2024 BMW 4 Series 24

Content A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
BMW 4 SERIES COUPE.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23 OwnersManuals2.com

OwnersManuals2.com
WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with the vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also
use the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. It contains important
notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical
features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information de-
signed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute
to maintaining the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the
most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as a Re-
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle
will contain the latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the
onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade

– the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
NOTES
Information ........................................................................................................... 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use ................................................................................................... 19
On the road ......................................................................................................... 23
CONTROLS
Dashboard .......................................................................................................... 30
Sensors of the vehicle ....................................................................................... 35
Operating condition of the vehicle .................................................................. 40
BMW iDrive ......................................................................................................... 43
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 58
Personal settings ............................................................................................... 62
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 69
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................. 99
Transporting children safely ........................................................................... 113
Driving ................................................................................................................ 118
Displays ............................................................................................................. 135
Lights ................................................................................................................. 156
Safety ................................................................................................................. 165
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 194
Driver assistance systems ............................................................................. 198
Parking .............................................................................................................. 223
Driving comfort ................................................................................................ 243
Climate control ................................................................................................. 244
Interior equipment ........................................................................................... 256
Storage compartments .................................................................................. 262
Cargo area ........................................................................................................ 266
4
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ............................................................... 270
Saving fuel ........................................................................................................ 276
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................... 282
Wheels and tires .............................................................................................. 284
Engine compartment ....................................................................................... 315
Operating materials ......................................................................................... 318
Maintenance .................................................................................................... 325
Replacing components ................................................................................... 327
Breakdown Assistance ................................................................................... 331
Vehicle Care ..................................................................................................... 338
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 344
Appendix .......................................................................................................... 346
Everything from A to Z ................................................................................... 348
© 2023 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID8 II/23, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Media at a glance
Orientation General information
The fastest way to find information on a partic- The contents of the Owner's Manual are avail-
ular topic is by using the index. able in various media formats. The following
For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend Owner's Manual media formats are available:
reading the quick reference guide in the own- ▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
er’s manual. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Validity of the Owner's Manual Printed Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual shows all stand-
Production of the vehicle
ard, country-specific and optional equipment
At the time of production at the plant, the that is currently available, or may become
printed Owner's Manual is the most current available in the future, for specific models.
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the Integrated Owner's Manual in the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
vehicle
Notes on updates can be found in the appen- Principle
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual shows all
standard, country-specific and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
After a software update in the vehicle
come available in the future, for specific mod-
After a vehicle software update, such as via els. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated displayed on the control display.
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information. Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Apps menu
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
2. "All apps"
Entertainment, Communication
3. "Owner's Manual"
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication is available as a 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
printed book from an authorized service cen- contents.
ter.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Swipe up or down until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
6
Information NOTES
Context help available in the future, for specific models. The

app can be displayed on smartphones and
General information tablets.
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac-
cessed from any menu. Depending on the BMW Driver’s Guide Web
selected function, either the associated de- The BMW Driver's Guide website shows all
scription or the main menu of the Integrated standard, country-specific, and optional equip-
Owner's Manual will be displayed. ment that is currently available, or may be-
come available in the future, for specific mod-
Selecting context help from a menu els. The BMW Driver’s Guide Web can be
1. Press and hold the desired menu item. displayed in any current browser.
2. "General help"
Selecting context help from a Check Control

Icons and displays
message
Directly from the Check Control message on Icons in the Owner's Manual
the control display:
Icon Meaning
"Owner's Manual"
Precautions that must be followed in
Supplementary Owner's Manuals order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Man-
serious damage to the vehicle.
uals, which are included in addition to the on-
board literature. Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Additional sources of "..." Texts in vehicle used to select

individual functions.
information
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
Service center
An authorized service center, e.g., a BMW ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
dealer or BMW service center, will be happy activation system.
to answer your questions at any time.
Action steps
Internet Action steps to be carried out are presented as
Vehicle information and general information on a numbered list. These steps must be carried
BMW, such as on technology, are available on out in the order shown.
the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
1. First action step.
BMW Driver’s Guide app 2. Second action step.
The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-

ard, country-specific, and optional equipment
Bulletpoint lists
that is currently available, or may become Items or actions without strict order or alterna-
tive options are shown as a bulletpoint list.
7
NOTES Information
▷ First possibility. An authorized service center is happy to an-

▷ Second possibility. swer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to the vehi-
cle.
Icons on vehicle parts
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the Status of the Owner's
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Manual
Vehicle features and options Basic information
The manufacturer of the vehicle pursues a pol-
This Owner's Manual shows all standard,
icy of constant development to ensure that our
country-specific, and optional equipment that
vehicles continue to embody the highest qual-
is currently available, or may become available
ity and safety standards. In rare cases, there-
in the future, for specific models, i.e., model
fore, the features described in this Owner's
series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also
Manual may deviate from those in the vehicle.
describes and illustrates equipment, systems
and functions that are not available in a vehi-
cle, for example due to the following situations:
Validity of the Owner's Manual
▷ Selected optional equipment
▷ National-market version or national-market
At the time of production at the plant, the
equipment
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
▷ Options for later release and software up- resource. Due to updates after the editorial
date deadline, differences may exist between the
This also applies to safety-related functions printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
and systems. Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Before starting a journey, verify whether the Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
described equipment or function is available dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
in the vehicle. For information on whether a cle.
function is currently available in the vehicle or
when the function can be installed in the ve- After a software update in the vehicle
hicle, contact an authorized service center or After a vehicle software update, such as via
other qualified service center. Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
A claim for the availability of equipment, a sys- Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
tem or a function in the vehicle cannot be de- latest information.
rived based on the description in the Owner's
Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the
For Your Own Safety
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
served. Intended use
For any equipment and models not described Heed the following when using the vehicle:
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple-
mentary Owner's Manuals.
8
Information NOTES
▷ Owner's Manual. ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby

▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove result in a safety hazard.
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
Parts and accessories
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where BMW recommends the use of parts and acces-
the vehicle is driven. sory products approved by BMW.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Approved parts and accessories, and advice
ments. on their use and installation are available from
an authorized service center.
Warranty BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
The vehicle is technically configured for the
vehicles.
operating conditions and registration require-
ments applicable in the country of first delivery, BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces-
also known as homologation. If the vehicle is sories.
to be operated in a different country it might BMW does not evaluate whether each individ-
be necessary to adapt the vehicle to potentially ual product from another manufacturer can be
differing operating conditions and registration used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
requirements. Noncompliance with homologa- safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
tion requirements in a certain country may approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
affect warranty coverage. Please consult the whether these products are suitable for BMW
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for fur- vehicles under all usage conditions.
ther information on warranty matters.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Maintenance and repairs For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
Advanced technology, for instance the use of vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
modern materials and high-performance elec- warning:
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and re-
pair work.
Warning
The vehicle manufacturer therefore recom-
mends having necessary work performed by Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
an authorized service center, e.g., a BMW tomobile components and parts, including
dealer or service center. If a different repair components found in the interior furnishings
shop is selected, BMW recommends select- in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known
ing a workshop that performs the appropriate to the State of California to cause cancer
work such as maintenance and repair accord- and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
ing to BMW specifications with properly trained addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
personnel. In the Owner's Manual, such works and certain products of component wear con-
are referred to as "another qualified authorized tain or emit chemicals known to the State
service center or repair shop". of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. Battery
If work is not carried out properly, for instance posts, terminals and related accessories con-
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub- tain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also
sequent damages and related safety risks. contain other chemicals known to the State
Improperly performed work on the vehicle of California to cause cancer. Wash your
paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of com- hands after handling. Used engine oil con-
9
NOTES Information
tains chemicals that have caused cancer in to operate the vehicle in another country or
laboratory animals. Always protect your skin region, you may be required to adapt the vehi-
by washing thoroughly with soap and water. cle to meet different prevailing operating con-
For more information go to www.P65Warn- ditions and homologation requirements. You
ings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. should also be aware of any applicable war-
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus-
tomer Relations for further information.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
Maintenance
senger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including en- Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
gine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, road safety, operational reliability and the New
and lead, which are known to the State of Vehicle Limited Warranty.
California to cause cancer and birth defects Specifications for maintenance measures:
or other reproductive harm. To minimize ex- ▷ BMW maintenance system.
posure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
Maintenance, refer to page 325.
the engine except as necessary, service the
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear ▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and
gloves or wash your hands frequently when accessible via a QR code in the New Vehi-
servicing the vehicle. For more information cle Limited Warranty Booklet.
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
vehicle. Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
maintained, this could result in serious dam-
Service and warranty age to the vehicle.
We recommend that you read this publication
A failure to maintain the vehicle or improper
thoroughly. The vehicle is covered by the fol-
maintenance may affect your warranty cover-
lowing warranties:
age. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Warranty Booklet for further information on
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. warranty matters.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War- Refer to section on engine oil change re-
ranty. garding recommended service intervals for oil
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. changes.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty. Data memory
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
General information
Booklet.
Electronic control devices are installed in the
The vehicle has been specifically adapted and
vehicle. Electronic control units process data
designed to meet the particular operating con-
they receive from vehicle sensors, self-gener-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
ate or exchange with each other. Some con-
country and continental region in order to de-
trol units are necessary for the vehicle to func-
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
tion safely or provide assistance during driving,
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
10
Information NOTES
for instance driver assistance systems. Fur- ▷ Operating states of system components,
thermore, control units facilitate comfort or in- such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta-
fotainment functions. tus.
Information about stored or exchanged data ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys-
can be requested from the manufacturer of the tem components, for instance lights and
vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example. brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
Personal reference situations such as airbag deployment or
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle engagement of the driving stability control
identification number. Depending on the coun- systems.
try, the vehicle owner can be identified with the ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
vehicle identification number, license plate and The data is required to perform the control unit
corresponding authorities. In addition, there functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
are other options to track data collected in the and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, such as manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
via the ConnectedDrive account that is used.
The majority of this data is stored temporarily
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Operating data in the vehicle In some circumstances the vehicle may store
Control units process data to operate the vehi- some data for an additional but limited period
cle. of time.
For example, this includes: When servicing, for instance during repairs,
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its service processes, warranty cases, and quality
individual components, e.g., wheel RPM, assurance measures, this technical informa-
wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration can be read out from the vehicle together
tion, engaged seat belt indicator. with the vehicle identification number.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain An authorized service center or another quali-
sensor signals. fied service center or repair shop can read
The processed data is only processed in the out the information. The diagnostic socket re-
vehicle itself while the vehicle is being oper- quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
ated. Data is not stored beyond the operating data.
time. The data is collected, processed, and used
Electronic components, e.g. control units and by the relevant organizations in the service
vehicle keys, contain components for storing network. The data documents technical condi-
technical information. Information about the tions of the vehicle, which can be used to de-
vehicle condition, component usage, mainte- termine vehicle maintenance status, and facili-
nance recommendations, events or faults can tate quality improvement.
be stored temporarily or permanently. Vehicle fault and event memories can be re-
This information generally documents the set by an authorized service center or another
state of a component, a module, a system, or qualified service center or repair shop when
the surrounding area, for instance: performing repair or servicing work.
11
NOTES Information
Data entry and data transfer into transferred to the mobile devices at the same
the vehicle time. Depending on the type of incorporation,
this includes, for instance, position data and
other general vehicle information. This opti-
General information
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort stance navigation or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the
There is no further interaction between the
vehicle and modified or reset at any time.
mobile device and the vehicle, such as active
For example, this includes: access to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel How the data will be processed further is de-
positions. termined by the provider of the particular app
▷ Chassis and climate control settings. being used. The extent of the possible settings
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en- depends on the respective app and the operat-
tertainment and communication system of the ing system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the
Services
respective equipment:
General information
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi- If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
media system. tion, it will enable data to be exchanged be-
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
wireless network connection is realized via an
with an integrated hands-free system or an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
integrated navigation system.
personal mobile devices brought into the ve-
▷ Entered navigation destinations. hicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. network connection enables 'online functions'
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or to be used. These include online services and
is found on a device that has been connected apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or by other providers.
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. Services from the vehicle manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties Where online services from the vehicle man-
upon personal request as part of the use of on- ufacturer are concerned, the corresponding
line services. The transmission depends on the functions are described in the appropriate
selected settings for the use of the services. place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal
Incorporation of mobile devices information pertaining to data protection may
also be found on the manufacturer’s website.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile Personal data may be used to perform online
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance services. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle nection, for instance with the IT systems of the
control elements. vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.
The sound and picture from the mobile devi- Any collection, processing, and use of personal
ces can be played back and displayed through data above and beyond that needed to pro-
the multimedia system. Certain information is vide the services must always be based on a
12
Information NOTES
legal permission, contractual arrangement or EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a
consent. It is also possible to activate or deac- nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re-
tivate the data connection as a whole. This ex- corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
cludes functions and services required by law tions and no personal data, for instance name,
such as Assist systems. gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
Services from other providers ment, could combine the EDR data with the
When using online services from other provid- type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
ers, these services are the responsibility of the quired during a crash investigation.
relevant provider and subject to their data pri- To read data recorded by an EDR, special
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
manufacturer has no influence on the content cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve-
exchanged during this process. Information on hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the way in which personal data is collected and enforcement, that have the special equipment,
used in relation to services from third parties, can read the information if they have access to
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can the vehicle or the EDR.
be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Vehicle identification
Event Data Recorder (EDR) number
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR General information
is to record, in certain crash or near crash- Depending on the national-market equipment,
like situations, such as an air bag deployment the vehicle identification number is located in
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will as- different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
sist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems describes all possible positions for the series.
performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
Engine compartment
systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in the vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The engraved vehicle identification number
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. can be found in the engine compartment, on
This data can help provide a better un- the right-hand side of the vehicle.
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
13
NOTES Information
Right nameplate iDrive

It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID (VIN):"
The vehicle identification number can be found

on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of Reporting safety defects
the vehicle.
For US customers
Left nameplate The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that the vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying BMW
of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West-
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
The vehicle identification number can be found If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the open an investigation, and if it finds that a
vehicle. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Windshield individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield. For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De-
14
Information NOTES
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the

toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
15
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing Locking with the vehicle key
1. Close the driver's door.
Vehicle key
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

system
Overview
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Stationary climate control. The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Open the cargo area.
Lock.
Panic mode.
Unlock.
Pathway lighting.
Access to vehicle interior Locking the vehicle

Unlocking with the vehicle key Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have

Unlocking the vehicle
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to Press the button.
unlock the other vehicle access points.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
cle is ready for operation.
16
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Panic mode Closing the cargo area automatically

You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-

cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Depending on the equipment:
Access to the cargo area
Press the button on the inside of the cargo
area.
Opening the cargo area
Displays, control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

ton on the trunk.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors
may be unlocked. 1 Light switch
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
Closing the cargo area manually 3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Depending on the equipment: pull down the

trunk lid with the recessed grips.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Driver's door Activating the voice control system
Switch console 1. Press the button on the steering

wheel briefly.
BMW iDrive 2. Say the command.
Principle Canceling voice control

BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions. ▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
Buttons on the Controller ▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Button Function
▷ Press the Controller.
Call up the main menu.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu

for navigation.
Go to previous menu.
Call up the Options menu.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions.
18
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the head restraint
wheel Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
Manually adjustable seats
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

1 Longitudinal direction push the head restraint down.
2 Thigh support ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
3 Seat tilt After setting the height, make sure that the
4 Backrest width head restraint engages correctly.
5 Lumbar support
6 Height Adjusting the height: electrical head
7 Backrest tilt
restraints
Electrically adjustable seats
Press switch up or down.
1 Backrest width
2 Height/longitudinal direction/seat tilt
3 Head restraint/backrest tilt
4 Lumbar support
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Adjusting the distance Adjusting the steering wheel

position
▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear. 1. Fold the lever down completely.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the 2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
front. and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
After setting the distance, make sure that the red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
head restraint engages correctly. tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Adjusting distance: M sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
Memory function
justed via the backrest inclination.
Principle
Adjusting the exterior mirrors The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
Overview
Icon Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb The memory buttons are located on the front
Monitor. doors.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Storing settings Electric longitudinal setting

1. Set the desired position.
Fold the seat backrest forward
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
Entering the rear 2. Fold the seat backrest forward.

To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat
Manual longitudinal setting
will automatically move to the most forward
position.
The process will be terminated when the
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
Push the seat backrest rearward

Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
position that was stored.
Infotainment
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward. Navigation destination input
Push the seat backrest rearward 1. Navigation menu
1. Push the seat back into the initial position. 2. "Destination input"
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. A search box and entered information such
as the search history are displayed.
3. Select the desired entry or the search box.
4. When selecting the search box, enter char-
acters or choose one of the POI categories
displayed.
If necessary, select to display more
information, e.g. to preview a map.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Apply the suggested search keywords as 5. Select the desired mobile phone.
necessary 6. Compare the control number displayed on
5. Select the desired entry. the control display with the control number
6. "Start guidance" in the display of the mobile phone, and con-
firm that they match.
Entertainment 7. If necessary, select the connection mode:
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- "Use Bluetooth"
market version, the instrument panel has the The device is connected and displayed in the
following buttons. device list.
Button Function
Accepting a call
Turn the button to adjust the Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
volume. can be answered in several ways.
Press the button to switch off ▷ Via iDrive:
the sound output. Pressing the
"Accept"
button again restores the pre-
vious volume setting.
Change the entertainment ▷

source. Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
Press once: changes the sta- to select from the list in the instrument clus-
tion/track. ter: "Accept"
Press and hold: fast for-
ward/rewind the track. Dialing a number
1. Communication menu
2. "More"
Using the mobile phone 3. "Dial number"
4. Enter the numbers.
General information
5. Select the icon. The connection is es-
After the mobile phone is connected once to tablished via the mobile phone to which this
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated function has been assigned.
using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.
Connecting via Bluetooth®

1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
Mobile phones in range are displayed on
the control display.
22
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
Driving Steptronic transmission
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

Drive-ready state R, S
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Turning off drive-ready state ▷ D is drive.
1. Apply brake and engage the selector lever ▷ N is neutral.

in position P. ▷ Reverse R.
2. Set the parking brake. ▷ S Sport mode.
3. Press the Start/Stop button. To prevent the vehicle from moving after en-
The READY indicator goes out and a signal gaging drive or reverse, maintain pressure on
tone sounds. the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Auto Start/Stop function vehicle is stationary.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. Sport program: the gearshift behavior is de-
The system switches off the engine during a signed for a sportier driving behavior.
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. Engaging selector lever position P
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
Engage selector lever position P only when the
lowing preconditions:
vehicle is stationary.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Press button P.
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Parking brake Light and view

Setting the parking brake
Turn signal, high beams, headlight
Pull the switch. flasher
The LED on the switch and the indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster are Turn signal
illuminated.
Releasing the parking brake

With drive-ready state switched on:
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released. ▷ Flashing: press the lever past the resist-
ance point.
Parking ▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
Make sure the parking brake is engaged. lever up or down.
▷ Brief flashing: press the lever to the resist-
ance point and hold it there for as long as
you want the turn signal to flashing.
High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
24
Lights and lighting ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.

▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
Buttons in the vehicle ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
Icon Function
Front fog lights

Turning off the window wiper system
and flick wipe
Exterior lighting off.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive lighting functions.
Low beams. Press the lever down.

▷ Turning off: press the lever down until it
reaches the 0 position.
Instrument lighting.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
Right roadside parking light. The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Left roadside parking light. Activating/deactivating rain sensor
Window wiper system
Turning on window wiper system
Enable: press lever up once from the 0 posi-

tion, arrow 1.
Disable: press lever back into the 0 position.
Press the lever up until the desired position is

reached.
25
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Icon Function
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-

trol.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Fresh air.
Cleaning the windshield

Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Pull the lever.
Active seat ventilation.

Climate control
Climate control functions Buttons, automatic climate control
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
26
Icon Function Intermediate stop

Defrost function.
Refueling
Rear window defroster. Fuel cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
Buttons, rear automatic climate control
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air distribution.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Switching off.
27
Wheels and tires The engine oil level is displayed.
Tire pressure specifications Adding engine oil

The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the General information
printed Owner's Manual. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the Adding engine oil
corrected tire pressures are applied automati- 1. Opening the hood.
cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
have been made. With tires that cannot be
found in the tire pressure values on the control
display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
the flat tire monitor.
Checking the tire pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month. 3. Add engine oil.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip. 4. Close the lid.
Cleaning the wheels

The friction during hard braking may produce Providing assistance
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW Hazard warning system
recommends using vehicle care and cleaning
agents from BMW.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the
combustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level Hazard warning system button

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
28
ConnectedDrive
BMW Assistance
Contact BMW Assistance for information and
support for all aspects of the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. Select the desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
BMW Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Your authorized service center.
29
CONTROLS Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle features and options available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Additional information:
ment, systems, and functions that are currently Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, individual 93 Unlocking
2 Seating comfort features Locking
Memory function 111

5 Lights
3 Exterior mirror adjustment button 108 Front fog lights 162
4 Central locking system 88

Light switch 156
30
Dashboard CONTROLS
Exterior lights off Depending on the equipment:

Daytime driving lights 159 Active Cruise Control on/off 205
Parking lights 157 With Steering Assistant 215:
Cruise Control, Distance Control
and lane guidance on/off
Automatic headlight control 156
Adaptive lighting functions 159
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Cruise Control: store the speed
160
Speed Limit Assistant: accept
Low beams 157
suggested speed 212
Interrupt or continue cruise control
Instrument lighting 162
Active Cruise Control: increase

Right roadside parking light 157 distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-

Left roadside parking light 157 tance
Cruise Control rocker switch

6 Pitman arm, left
Turn signal 130
9 Instrument cluster 135
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
High beams, headlight flasher Displaying menu bar in instru-
130 ment cluster 135
Automatic High Beam Assistant Volume, see Owner's Manual for
160 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Trip data 150
Voice activation system 51
G-Meter 152
7 Shift paddles 123

Selecting menu contents in instru-
8 Steering wheel buttons, left ment cluster 135
Manual Speed Limiter 200 Changing the station/track, see
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Cruise Control on/off 202
31
CONTROLS Dashboard
Telephone, see Owner's Manual Wipers 131

for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Rain sensor 132
Thumbwheel for selecting con-
figuration menus for instrument
cluster and Head-up display 135 Cleaning the windshield 133
Using infotainment selection lists
in the instrument cluster 146
12 Horn, entire surface
11 Pitman arm, right
13 Steering wheel heating 111
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 110

15 Unlocking the hood 316
16 Opening and closing cargo area

81
17 Fold-out compartment 263
32
Dashboard CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control display 46 4 Button for glove compartment 262

2 Ventilation 251 5 Controller with buttons 48
3 Hazard warning system 331 6 Automatic Hold 128
Climate control 244 Parking brake 127

Defrost function 250
7 Driving Dynamics Control 125

Rear window defroster 250 SPORT drive mode
COMFORT drive mode
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-
cation 6 ECO PRO drive mode
Adjusting the volume
8 Turning drive-ready state on/off

Station/title forward 118
Station/title back
33
CONTROLS Dashboard
9 Auto Start/Stop function 118 Panorama view 230
Parking assistance systems 223 Dynamic Stability Control 195
10 Selector lever 120
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 333 4 Reading lights 163
2 Operating the electric glass sun- 5 Interior lights 163

roof 95
3 Indicator light, front passenger

airbag 167
34
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Front camera
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi- The front camera is located in the radiator
cle: grille.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Camera behind the windshield. Camera behind the windshield
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
35
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
Top view cameras ▷ When the camera field of view is covered,

for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ With open doors or open cargo area.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
▷ The camera has overheated due to exces-
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
off.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi-
Rearview camera ately after vehicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
The rearview camera is located in the emblem Warning

on the rear end. The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
Functional requirement of the is a risk of accident. Watch the surrounding
cameras traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear. steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 338.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 339.
System limits of the cameras

The function of the cameras can be limited or
may indicate something wrong, for instance in
the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
36
Front radar sensor Functional requirement of the radar

sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
System limits of the radar sensors

The front radar sensor is located in the front The function of the radar sensors can be lim-
bumper. ited or not available, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
Radar sensors, side, front
▷ In case of iced-up sensors.
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
The radar sensors are located to the side in hills, vehicles or trailers.
the front bumper. ▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Radar sensors, side, rear ▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
The radar sensors are located on the side in

the rear bumper.
37
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
Ultrasonic sensors Functional requirement of the

ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors, front The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
System limits of the ultrasonic

sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis- the following situations:
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
▷ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear ▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis- ▷ In case of external interference with the
tance systems are located in the rear bumper. ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
Ultrasonic sensors, side ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis- ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
tance systems are located on the side in the smooth surfaces.
front and rear bumpers.
38
▷ For objects with a fine surface or objects

such as wire mesh fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed
bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
39
CONTROLS Operating condition of the vehicle
Operating condition of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
This chapter describes model-specific equip- turn the front wheels in the direction of
ment, systems, and functions that are currently the curb.
available, or may become available in the fu- ▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. also secure the vehicle, for instance with
Additional information: a wheel chock.
Warning
General information Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
one of the three states: following actions:
▷ Idle state. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Standby state. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Drive-ready state. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Idle state ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Principle leave children or animals unattended in the
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
off. exiting and lock the vehicle.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
Establishing the sleep mode
from the outside and after exiting and locking. automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically,
Safety information such as in the following situations:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
Warning
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
low.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle ▷ Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
against rolling away. one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
40
Operating condition of the vehicle CONTROLS
In some situations, the idle state is not set au- Manually setting to standby
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on. General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
Establishing idle state when hicle is automatically set to idle state.
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established Via button on the radio
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
Press the button on the radio.
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
The control display and the in-
1. Apps menu strument cluster illuminate.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock" Via start/stop button
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
Establishing the sleep mode ment cluster illuminate.
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the button on
Display in the instrument cluster
the radio until the OFF indicator OFF is displayed in the instru-
on the instrument cluster goes ment cluster. The drivetrain is
out. switched off and standby state
switched on.
Standby state
Drive-ready state
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func- Principle
tions can be used while the vehicle is station- Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted. starting the engine.
General information General information

The vehicle is in the standby state after the Some vehicle functions can only be used with
front doors are opened from the outside. the drive-ready state switched on.
41
CONTROLS Operating condition of the vehicle
Safety information Turning on the drive-ready state
General information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is Drive-ready state is switched on
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene- via the Start/Stop button.
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and Turning on the drive-ready state
ensure sufficient ventilation. 1. Depress the brake pedal.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
Warning brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and gine starts.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle strument cluster illuminate for a varied length
against rolling away. of time.
against rolling away, follow the following: Gasoline engine
▷ Set the parking brake. Depending on the motorization, the full drive
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, power may not be available for approximately
turn the front wheels in the direction of 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this
the curb. case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, Additional information:
also secure the vehicle, for instance with Power gauge, refer to page 147.
a wheel chock.
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
NOTICE in the instrument cluster, depending on the
Repeated attempts to start the engine or re- equipment, by the display of information re-
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid suc- quired for driving or the READY display.
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately Turning off drive-ready state
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage
vehicle stopped.
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid 2. Set the parking brake.
succession. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
42
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
Vehicle features and options a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Main menu
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. General information
The main menu is divided into different areas.
Display and operating Overview

concept
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows: 1 Menu bar
▷ Via the control display. 2 Widgets
▷ Via the Controller. 3 Status information
▷ Via the touchpad. 4 Climate bar, climate 244
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

▷ Via the operating elements on the steering Menu bar
wheel.
Menu Apps
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
Instrument cluster, refer to page 135.
filter can be selected. The last selected filter
is stored. If necessary, change the filter to see
Safety information the apps you want.
▷ "All apps": All apps and functions are dis-
Warning played.
Operating the integrated information systems ▷ "Infotainment apps": Only infotainment
and communication devices while driving can apps are displayed.
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi- ▷ "Vehicle apps": Only vehicle adjustment
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is functions are displayed.
43
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Media menu Telephone status information

Access to entertainment system functions,
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing. Icon Meaning
Active call.
Communication menu
Access to telephone and message function Signal strength.
as well as pairing and management of mobile SIM card missing.
devices, e.g., smartphones.
Entertainment status information
Navigation menu
Access to navigation system, destination Icon Meaning
entry, and traffic information. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as points USB audio.
of interest.
Bluetooth audio.
Apple CarPlay© menu Smartphone audio.

Depending on national-market version with Connected Music with Spotify.
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer- Time shift.
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via
Wi-Fi.
iDrive.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto© menu
Android Auto.
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Android Auto. Satellite radio is switched on.
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain
functions of a compatible Android smartphone Status information for notifications
via iDrive.
Icon Meaning
Widgets
Number of notifications.
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as the navigation map. Check Control message.
The widgets also serve as buttons and allow
Suppress private information.
jumping to the relevant menu.
Do not disturb.
Status information
Notification.
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis- Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
played in the form of icons. Depending on the ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
equipment and national-market version, differ-
ent icons are available.
44
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Other status information Activating/deactivating the functions

Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Icon Meaning Selecting the menu item enables or disables
Sound output active. the function.
Sound output deactivated. Icon Meaning
Activation word active. Function is activated.
BMW ID or driver profile. Function is deactivated.
Destination guidance active.

Enabling/disabling audible feedback
Go to quick access. 1. Apps menu
Wireless charging active. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Park Distance Control: sound active. 3. "System settings"

4. "Sound"
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated. 5. Select the desired setting.
Quick access
Input and display
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
certain settings, and app recommendations.
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered using the Input Operation
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice Show Swipe from top to bottom on the
control, depending on vehicle equipment. quick link. control display.
Icon Function Slide the controller up.
Change between capital and Tap the icon on the status
lower-case letters. bar.
Enter a blank space. Hide Swipe from the bottom up on the

quick link. control display.
Switching between languages.
Slide the controller down.
Use voice control.
Confirm entry. Activating/deactivating pop-ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
Shift the input area to the left
automatically on the control display. Some of
or right.
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
Entry comparison 1. Apps menu
When entering data from a database such as 2. "Vehicle apps"

contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed 3. "System settings"
down for each character entered, with charac- 4. "Pop-ups"
ters being added as necessary.
5. Select the desired setting.
45
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Shortcuts Additional information:

Caring for special components, refer to
General information page 341.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance Overview
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Storing a function
1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
1 Instrument cluster 135
Executing a function 2 Control display 46
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Tap the desired shortcut. Control display
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es- Principle
tablished when a phone number is selected. The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
Deleting shortcuts
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control Safety information
display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut. Warning
3. "Delete shortcut" Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
BMW Curved Display driving, such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
Principle of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
display in the vehicle that is curved towards
the driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises
the instrument cluster on the driver’s side and
the control display on the center console.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
46
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
4. "Control display"
Warning 5. "Brightness at night"
Objects in the area in the front of the control 6. Make the desired setting.
display can slip and damage the control dis- Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
play. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- ness control may not be clearly visible.
age to property. Do not place objects in the
area in front of the control display.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Overview control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Controller
General information
Control display
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly.
Switching the control display on/off
automatically Overview
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Switching the control display on/off

manually
Controller
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display. Buttons on the Controller
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again. Button Function
Call up the main menu.

Setting the brightness
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps" Call up the Media/Radio menu.
3. "Displays"
47
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Button Function
Go to Phone menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu

for navigation.
Go to previous menu. Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu
Call up the Options menu.
Press the button.
Operation The main menu is displayed.

▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
ample. Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Selecting a widget
1. Slide the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. 3. Press the Controller.
Switching between menus

A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
▷ Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
▷ Slide in four directions to switch between ▷ Press the button.

menus, for example. The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
48
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers 4. "Touchpad"

Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num- Entering letters and numbers
bers. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
2. : confirm entry. the control display.
Setting the system language, refer to ▷ Always enter associated characters, such
page 53. as accents or periods, so that the letter can
be clearly recognized.
Deleting an entry ▷ The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
Icon Function characters via the Controller.
Press Controller: delete a letter or num- Setting the system language, refer to
ber. page 53.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let- Entering special characters
ters or numbers.
Function Operation
Using alphabetical lists
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 enter. touchpad.
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box. Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
space. center of the touchpad.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly. Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
pad.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list. Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the
score. lower area of the touch-
pad.
Operation via touchpad
Using the map
General information The map in the navigation system can be
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive moved via the touchpad.
functions can be operated with the controller Tap the map on the control display and then
touchpad. continue operation using the touchpad.
Function Operation
Selecting functions
1. Apps menu Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings" Display menu. Tap once.
49
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Using alphabetical lists Sorting apps

Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en- sired icon and move it to the desired location.
try exists.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad. Switching between menus
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed A new display opens after a menu item is se-
in the list. lected.
Swipe from left to right on the control display.
Operation via control display The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
General information Calling up the context menu

Depending on the equipment version, the con- Depending on the menu item, a context menu
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen. with additional options can be displayed.
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Press and hold the desired menu item.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
not use any objects.
stance:
▷ "General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
Opening the main menu
er's Manual.
Tap on the icon.
▷ "Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
The main menu is displayed. shortcut.
Adjusting widgets Entering letters and numbers

The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed Input
when the vehicle is stationary. 1. If necessary, tap the icon or control
1. If necessary, tap the icon. display.
2. Press and hold the widget. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
Deleting an entry
▷ Tap on the icon.
A new widget can be selected. Icon Function
▷ Tap on the icon.
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
The widget is deleted.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
▷ Press and hold the widget and drag to
ters or numbers.
the left or right.
The widget is moved to the desired po-
sition. Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
50
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Function Operation ▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently

as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate and speed.
direction.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin- ken.
map. gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
▷ A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
Setting the system language, refer to
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- page 53.
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
▷ Always say commands in the configured
be displayed in a text box.
system language.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list. For the full range of functions, the following
A letter box is displayed. functions should be activated, set or booked:
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry. ▷ Online speech processing, refer to
The first entry of the selected letter is dis- page 54.
played in the list. ▷ For all settings under
Data protection, refer to page 62.
BMW Intelligent Personal ▷ Activation word, refer to page 52.
Assistant ▷ BMW ID or a driver profile.

▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
Principle
▷ Get suggestions, refer to page 54.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice Activating the voice control system
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate
General information
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions
and automating habits. There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
General information
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail- ▷ Press the button on the steering
able depending on national-market version. wheel briefly.
▷ The system includes special microphones The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
on the driver side and the front passenger tive.
side. ▷ Speaking the activation word.
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. The microphones on the driver's or front
Speaking directly into the microphone does passenger's side are active with the follow-
not improve voice recognition. ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
51
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Then say the command. The activation word 3. "System settings"

and the command can be spoken without 4. "Voice control"
pause in one sentence.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
Microphone button on steering wheel 6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
1. Press button briefly.
9. "Start recording"
2. Say the command.
Activation word from third-party providers

Activation word
Depending on the national-market version,
General information some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
Saying the activation word will start the Per-
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis- To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
tens. nected via Apple CarPlay.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
Preset activation word connected smartphone in the vehicle.
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can The activation word from connected third-
be activated and deactivated. party providers can be used in addition to your
preset or personal activation word from BMW.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. Apps menu
3. "System settings" 2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Voice control" 3. "System settings"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)" 4. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word" 5. "Additional speech assistants"
7. ""Hello BMW"" 6. Select the desired setting.
Personal activation word Canceling voice control

In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with ▷ Press the button on the steering
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per- wheel again.
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted. ▷ ›Cancel‹
The activation word should consist of multiple ▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
syllables to ensure good recognition. ▷ Press the Controller.
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary
for the activation word and does not need to Possible commands
be spoken.
General information
1. Apps menu
Commands can be used to give instructions
2. "Vehicle apps" or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant
providing assistance.
52
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
For example, you can call contacts, navigate Menu items

to an address, apply settings, or ask questions The Personal Assistant can bring up menu
about a vehicle function. items directly. Say the menu items as they are
Most content on the control display can be displayed on the control display. You do not
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list have to follow the order of the menu items
entries. when speaking them out loud.
1. Activate the voice control system.

Help for voice control
2. ›Media‹
▷ ›Voice commands‹: have possible example
commands suggested. 3. ›Presets‹
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have The stored stations are displayed on the
information on the operating principle of the control display.
voice control announced.
▷ ›Help‹: have tips and example commands Owner's Manual via voice operation
for voice control announced. You can ask simple questions about vehicle
▷ Additional example commands for the cur- functions and the operation of the vehicle.
rent context are displayed in the widget of The voice activation system and the feed-
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. back it provides do not replace the printed
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
Sample commands is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition and quality of
▷ ›Call John Smith‹
the feedback may vary.
▷ ›Drive me to JFK airport‹
Example command: ›How can the passenger
▷ ›Play a classical music station‹ airbag be deactivated?‹
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹ The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
▷ ›Activate the climate control‹ When stationary, the section of the integrated
▷ ›Increase the ACC distance‹ Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
▷ ›Sport mode‹
Additional example commands can be dis- Settings
played on the control display.
1. Apps menu Setting the system language
2. "All apps" 1. Apps menu
3. "Personal assistant" 2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Help" 3. "System settings"
5. "Example commands" 4. "Language"
Sample commands for the current context are 5. Select the desired setting.
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-
sistant widget. Setting the response length
Additional information: You can set the Personal Assistant to use
Adjust widgets, refer to page 50. standard dialog or a short version. In case of
the short version, the announcements by the
53
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab- Adapting suggestions

breviated version. Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by
1. Apps menu category or to output a signal tone.
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. Apps menu

3. "System settings" 2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Voice control" 3. "System settings"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)" 4. "Voice control"
6. "Response length" 5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
7. Select the desired setting. 6. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output Online speech processing

It is possible to answer during inquiries of the Online speech processing improves the quality
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis- of the speech recognition and search results
abled if requests are often canceled uninten- for points of interest. To use the functions,
tionally, for instance due to background noise data is transmitted to a service provider via an
or conversations in the vehicle. encrypted connection and stored locally there.
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required
1. Apps menu
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
2. "Vehicle apps" available depending on the national-market
3. "System settings" version. Online speech processing is not avail-
4. "Voice control" able in all languages.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)" 1. Apps menu

6. "Speaking during voice output" 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
Suggestions 4. "Voice control"
General information 5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
The Personal Assistant helps with individual 6. "Online speech processing"

suggestions.
Voice control from third-party
Activating/deactivating suggestions providers
1. Apps menu Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be enabled by pressing and
2. "Vehicle apps"
holding the microphone button on the steering
3. "System settings" wheel.
4. "Voice control"
1. Apps menu
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Receive suggestions"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Long press"
54
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Adjusting the volume Activating Amazon Alexa Car

Turn the volume button during the voice guid- Integration
ance until the desired volume is set. Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
The volume remains constant even if the vol- the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.
ume of other audio sources is changed. Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
Using the voice activation of the 1. Apps menu
smartphone
2. "Amazon Alexa"
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
vehicle as follows:
control.
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
sired command.
Play or Android Auto.
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
1. Press and hold the button on the is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. necessary.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated. Automating routines
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows
2. Press and hold the button on the in the same place. Rules are created for this
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the purpose, which can be activated and deacti-
smartphone. vated at any time.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration Activating/deactivating routines

1. Apps menu
Principle
2. "All apps"
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
3. "Automate habits"
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant 4. Select the desired setting.
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For System limits
safety reasons, some Alexa functions may not ▷ The Personal Assistant provides informa-
be fully available in the vehicle when driving. tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
Functional requirement
This also applies to safety-related functions
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile is activated. and systems.
▷ An active Amazon account must exist. ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
55
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
▷ Noises from the front passenger or occu- The following information sources can also be
pants can impair the system. Avoid making used:
other noise in the vehicle while speaking. ▷ Driver’s Guide app.
▷ Major language dialects can cause prob- ▷ Driver’s Guide Web.
lems with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re- Safety information
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
Connecting mobile devices and communication devices while driving can
to the vehicle distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
Principle devices when the traffic situation allows. As
Various connection types are available for us- warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec- vices while the vehicle is stationary.
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and the desired function.
Overview
General information The following overview shows possible func-
Detailed information on the functions and con- tions and the suitable connection types for
nection types can be found in the following them. The range of functions depends on the
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci- vehicle equipment and the mobile device.
fied keyword:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Printed Owner’s Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
Function Connection type Icon on the con-

trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.

tem. Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a mobile device. Bluetooth audio.

Keyword: audio. Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone. Personal eSIM.

Keyword: calling with the Personal Keyword: Personal eSIM.
eSIM.
56
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Function Connection type Icon on the con-

trol display
Data exchange between mobile de- Wi-Fi.

vice and vehicle. Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
hotspot. Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

via voice control. Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
voice control. Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device. USB.

Keyword: audio. Keyword: USB connection.
USB port, refer to page 259.
57
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and options There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software ▷ Cellular network reception.
Upgrade ▷ Consent to transmit the corresponding data

was given in the Data Protection menu.
Principle
Data protection, refer to page 62.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
Search for an upgrade
ments or quality improvements available.
General information Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
Safety information the background.
Manual search
Warning
1. Apps menu
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
2. "All apps"
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 3. "System settings"
following actions: 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 5. "Search for upgrades"
▷ Releasing the parking brake. 6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- play.
dows.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Download of an upgrade mote Software Upgrade. During the download

and after the installation has been successfully
Automatic download completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the This information is also available in the Con-
vehicle. No download consent is required. nectedDrive customer portal.
Via BMW app Displaying information

If an upgrade is available, information about Display in the vehicle:
the new software version is displayed in the 1. Apps menu
BMW app.
2. "All apps"
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
The data can then be transmitted from the 5. ▷ Display currently installed version:
mobile device to the vehicle. "Installed version:"
This transmission method accelerates the ▷ Display new available version:
download of the data, for instance in areas "Information on version"
with limited mobile network availability.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to play.
the smartphone. Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷ iOS: Connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi. Installing the upgrade
▷ Android: Connect Bluetooth audio and
Wi-Fi. General information
The data transfer of the upgrade from the ▷ Installation of the Remote Software Up-
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the grade may result in the deletion of software
background only while driving. changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
play. ▷ Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, facturer can lead to an interruption of the
see Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertain- installation.
ment, Communication.
▷ The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
Information about the version
▷ The installation may take around 20 mi-
nutes.
General information
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
59
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the in- Installing immediately

stallation. The upgrade can be installed immediately
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the instal- when all prerequisites have been met.
lation.
1. Apps menu
Prerequisites for the installation 2. "All apps"
▷ The state of charge of the vehicle battery is 3. "System settings"
sufficient. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ The outside temperature is above 5. "Start upgrade now"
14 ℉/-10 ℃. 6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- play.
tion.
▷ The hazard warning system is turned off. Installing with timer
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged. When the trip is completed, a timer can be
▷ The engine is turned off and sufficiently used to install the upgrade automatically at
cooled down. a configured time, such as during the night.
A later installation may make sense to meet
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre- functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
requisites on the control display. cooled down engine.
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi-
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade 1. Apps menu
will not be offered for installation. 2. "All apps"
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g., 3. "System settings"
after longer trips. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
Preparing the vehicle
The installation starts automatically when:
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road. ▷ All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the ▷ All prerequisites continue to be met at the
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in- time of installation.
stallation is terminated. The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
▷ Close the windows. state is turned on.
▷ Close the glass sunroof.

Functional limitations
▷ Close the trunk.
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such temporarily unavailable, for instance:
as a mobile phone.
▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
cle for the consent for installation.
Comfort Access.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Remove the devices connected to the diag-
▷ Horn.
nostic socket.
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Glass sunroof.
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as. Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual

At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update, such as via
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
61
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle features and options This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
General information
available, or may become available in the fu- Depending on the equipment, the following
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. data is deleted:
Additional information: ▷ BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored shortcuts.
Data protection ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina-

tions.
▷ Phone book.
Data transfer
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
Principle ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
The vehicle offers different services, whose ▷ Login accounts.

use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv- ▷ Digital key.
ice provider. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
General information moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
The data transfer can be deactivated for some Drive customer portal so that remote functions
services. When the data transfer is deacti- can no longer be used.
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Settings ▷ Data can only be deleted while stationary.
The data transfer can be configured in different ▷ The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
stages or individually for separate services.
1. Apps menu Deleting data
2. "Vehicle apps" The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
4. "Data privacy"
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 62.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Reset vehicle data
Principle
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
personal data, such as stored radio stations. tory settings when the drive-ready state is
62
Personal settings CONTROLS
switched off. Data can only be deleted while A BMW ID or driver profile can be activated
stationary. The vehicle key must be in the vehi- while unlocking. For this purpose, the driver
cle. recognition must be assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile via a vehicle key or a digital
1. Apps menu
key.
2. "Vehicle apps"
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
3. "System settings" the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
4. "Reset vehicle data" guest profile.
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If setting synchronization has been activated
for a BMW ID in the vehicle, personal settings When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,
are kept in the BMW Cloud. changed, deleted, or edited, the vehicle must
move no faster than at walking speed.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
BMW ID/driver profiles synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
Principle reception.
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is

the personal login for all relevant offers for the
Welcome window
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle is shown on the control display. The type of
settings. the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles. ▷ The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
General information The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
ID can be registered via the BMW app, in the ▷ The vehicle key or the digital key has not
ConnectedDrive Portal, or with an authorized been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
service center. file:
A driver profile is created in the vehicle. The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
If a vehicle is used by several people, each IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
person can create their own BMW ID or driver for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
profile in order to save their personal settings. add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
If a BMW ID or driver profile is activated, the
settings stored for it are applied in the vehicle. ▷ A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the The welcome is personalized, the stored
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa- settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is driver profile can be changed.
used to log in. As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three or the control display is tapped outside of the
driver profiles. Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
63
Registering your BMW ID If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the

settings of the guest profile will be ap-
To use a BMW ID, proceed as follows:
plied.
▷ Register your BMW ID.
▷ "Continue"
▷ Activate the BMW ID.
The vehicle is added to the user’s BMW app.
▷ Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.
Registration of your BMW ID in the vehicle can Confirming a BMW ID
be started via the BMW app.
If the BMW ID has been created by an author-
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the ized service center and added to the vehicle,
status bar. the BMW ID must then be confirmed in the
2. "Add BMW ID" vehicle:
3. "Register now" 1. Select the BMW ID.

4. Scan the QR code shown in the display. 2. Select the desired confirmation:
The BMW ID is created on the smartphone. ▷ Scan the displayed QR code with the
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by BMW app.
the authorized service center and added to the ▷ Enter the password for the BMW ID.
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve- BMW app
hicle.
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the BMW
Adding the BMW ID app. This means that BMW app functions can
An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi- be used for this vehicle. To do so, the BMW
cle: app must be used with the same BMW ID.
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the
status bar. BMW app by the authorized service center. In
2. "Add BMW ID" this case, the BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
3. ▷ "Log in with My BMW App"
hicle.
▷ "Log in with BMW ID" In rare cases, the use of BMW app functions
4. ▷ Scan the QR code shown on the display. for this vehicle may be restricted. More infor-
The BMW ID is copied from the BMW mation is shown on the control display.
app.
▷ Enter the access data for the BMW ID. Creating a driver profile
5. Depending on the national-market version, 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
the following settings can be selected: status bar.
▷ "Synchronize BMW ID" 2. "Add driver profile"
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud 3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
are applied. 4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Transfer settings" "Transfer settings"
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
64
Primary user The digital key that is recognized in the ve-

hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
The primary user is the person who first enters
the driver profile.
their BMW ID into the vehicle and the vehicle
into the BMW app. Alternatively, the primary
user can be defined by an authorized service Automatic driver recognition
center. If driver recognition has been established, au-
The primary user has access to the following tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
settings, for example: file is triggered by the following actions:
▷ Removing BMW IDs stored in the vehicle. ▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷ Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID. ▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an external
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
▷ Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
the assigned Digital Key must be carried
tings.
with you.
▷ Create the main digital key.
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching
Additional information: the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86. assigned Digital Key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
Specifying driver detection be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
Driver detection and a PIN can be set up for a If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
BMW ID or a driver profile. in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
The driver detection offers the following ad-
the following priority:
vantages:
▷ The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
▷ The BMW ID or the driver profile with saved
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
settings is activated automatically.
the assigned driver profile.
▷ The settings are not accessible to other
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
persons.
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
The driver detection is specified immediately signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
following the addition of the BMW ID or after
▷ If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are
creating the driver profile.
detected at the same time, the Digital
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a Key triggers the activation of the assigned
PIN must be created. BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.
▷ "Set PIN" ▷ If another key is detected on the driver's
The PIN can be used to activate the door after activating the BMW ID or the
BMW ID or the driver profile, even if the driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital file of the last key detected is activated.
key is not available. If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
▷ "Vehicle key" signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
The vehicle key that is recognized in the vated.
vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile.
▷ "Digital Key"
65
Setting synchronization In the following cases the guest profile is auto-

matically active:
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu- ▷ A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
ously synchronized: driver profile has not yet been created.
▷ BMW ID, e.g., profile picture. ▷ No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
▷ Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
address, or map settings.
The following limitations apply to the guest
▷ Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
profile:
tions.
▷ Selected functions that edit personal data
▷ iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
are not available in the guest profile. This
guage, or units.
includes functions of the navigation and
▷ Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac- the saving of favorites. More information
tivation word. on data processing is available in the Con-
▷ Exterior lighting, e.g., flashing indicator and nectedDrive data protection notes / service
home lights. descriptions.
Settings from the following areas are only ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
synchronized when you log in for the first time: ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
▷ Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s guest profile.
seat position or temperature setting. ▷ It is not possible to assign driver detection
▷ Data protection menu. to the guest profile.
▷ In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select screen or via iDrive:
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window. 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"
at any time via iDrive:
▷ "Change driver profile"
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar. 3. "Continue as guest"
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"

Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile. status bar.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN. 2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated, ▷ "Change driver profile"
the stored settings are loaded.
3. Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
Guest profile
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
The guest profile can be activated and the vehicle to be removed from the BMW app.
changed by anyone. If the BMW ID has been synchronized with the
66
BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud ▷ The type of driver detection.
is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the ▷ The profile picture.
currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest
▷ The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
profile is activated.
▷ The personal salutation.
Removing a vehicle from the BMW app re-
moves the corresponding BMW ID from the The following settings are available for the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with driver profile:
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the ▷ The type of driver detection.
BMW Cloud will be retained. ▷ The profile picture.
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us- ▷ The profile name.
er’s BMW app, it will also be removed from
the other users’ BMW apps. The correspond-
Selecting a profile picture
ing BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
The profile picture can be selected from the
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, the
predefined profile pictures:
vehicle is removed from all users’ BMW apps
and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle. 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
Transfer of the vehicle key 2. "Settings"
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or 3. "Manage profile picture"
a driver profile can be used to view or change 4. "Select profile picture"
the stored personal settings.
For a BMW ID, the personal profile picture can
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per- be taken from the profile in the BMW app.
sons, any assigned driver detection should be This requires that the synchronization with the
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can BMW Cloud is activated in the settings. After
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the the profile picture from the BMW app has
driver profile. been applied, you can only select from the
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to predefined pictures if the profile picture in the
transfer a digital key to permit other persons BMW app is deleted or synchronization is de-
the use of your own vehicle. activated.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86. System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
Settings the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
General information ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre- locked and unlocked.
ating a driver profile can be changed. ▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
status bar.
driver's side of the vehicle.
2. "Settings"
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
The following settings are available for the BMW app.
BMW ID:
67
The use of personal settings that are stored for

a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
68
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Overview
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- Buttons on the vehicle key.
tery.
Icon Meaning
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible Unlock.
for the button functions.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key. Lock.
To provide information on maintenance rec- Stationary climate control, refer to
ommendations, the service data is stored in page 253.
the vehicle key.
Open the cargo area.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle. Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.
Safety information
Additional vehicle keys

Warning
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
authorized service center or another qualified
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
service center or repair shop.
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
69
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Loss of vehicle keys 3. Push battery in arrow direction using a

pointed object and lift it out.
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery

4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing up.
NOTICE
5. Press the lid closed.
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
of damage to property. Always replace the until the integrated key engages.
discharged battery with a battery with the Have old batteries disposed of by an
same voltage, the same size and the same authorized service center or another
specification. qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Integrated key
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
General information
lift the lid with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2. The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with-
out the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
70
Removing the integrated key Use the thumb for counter support to pre-
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the vent the cover cap from falling out of the
integrated key, arrow 2. door handle.
2. Pull off frame from integrated key. 3. Remove the cover cap.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Unlocking/locking via the door lock

1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with The other doors must be unlocked using the
one hand. central locking button or manually from the in-
side.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
the back under the cover cap and push the activated.
cover cap out.
71
Emergency detection of the vehicle Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
key imity to other electronic devices.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected. state.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the BMW display key
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
to the display in the instrument cluster.
General information
2. ▷ If the vehicle key is detected:
The Display Key is available with pre-heating.
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
The Display Key may not be available depend-
onds.
ing on the country. In this case, independent
▷ If the vehicle key is not detected: heating can be operated via the BMW app.
Slightly change the position of the vehi- An additional mechanical key is included with
cle key and repeat the procedure. the Display Key. If the display key is used, the
mechanical key should be carried with you, for
Malfunction instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
A Check Control message is displayed where used like the integrated key.
applicable. The display key supports all functions of the
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal- standard vehicle key.
function under the following circumstances: In addition, the following functions are also
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. available:
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission ▷ Display status of doors and windows.
towers or other equipment with high trans- ▷ Display status of the alarm system.
mitting power. ▷ Display service information.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ▷ Call up range with available fuel.
objects.
▷ Operate pre-heating.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
Integrated key, refer to page 70.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
72
Safety information Overview
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Buttons on the BMW Display Key.

Warning
Icon Meaning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par- Unlock.
ticular knowledge.
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper- Lock.
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it. Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Warning
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Turn the display on/off.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Micro-USB charging port.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
Back.
dows.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Reception range
leave children or animals unattended in the The number of available display key functions
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when depends on the distance from the vehicle.
73
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve- To return to the original page: tap on the
hicle, all functions of the display key are icon beneath the display.
available.
▷ When you are in the extended reception Lower status line
range, you can access status information The lower status line indicates whether or not
and operate the pre-heating. the display key is within reception range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the ve- ▷ "Connected": the display key is within re-
hicle, you can display the last transmitted ception range.
status information from the vehicle. ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re-
The icon is shown on the display if one of ception range. It indicates when the last
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception data transfer from the vehicle took place.
range.
Turning on/off
Display The display will go out automatically after a
short time to conserve battery power.
General information
Hiding the display on the display manually:
The display is divided into the upper status press the button on the left side of the display
line, the information area, and the lower status key.
line.
To show the display:
Upper status line 1. Press the button on the left side of the dis-
The upper status line displays the following play key.
information: 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unse- top to unlock the screen lock.
cured. To turn off the display to increase the usable
▷ Set time in the vehicle. battery life:
▷ Charge state of the display key bat- 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
tery. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
Information area 3. "OK"
The information area can be used to access To turn the display on:
information and perform additional functions.
Press the button on the left side of the display
If the information area contains more than one key.
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
Operating concept
A solid indicator denotes the current
The following information shows how to ac-
page.
cess the information and functions using the
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to main menus.
change between the pages.
If further information is available on a page,
tap the appropriate icon.
74
Main menu Information/Function ▷ Due to the large number of USB charg-

ers available on the market, it cannot be
"Security / guaranteed that every charger will function
information" Door status. properly. The charging time depends on the
charger used.
Alarm system status.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
After alarm activation:
charger and the display key.
date, time, and reason
for the alarm activation. Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
Window status. through the display key may be reduced,
Glass sunroof status. and in isolated cases the charging process
may be interrupted temporarily.
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators
information" of Condition Based Serv- ▷ When inserting the display key into the
ice CBS. wireless charging tray, make sure there
are no objects between it and the wireless
Status of the roadside
charging tray.
parking lights.
"Mobility info" Range with available Safety information

fuel.
"Preconditioning Operate pre-heating. Warning

setting" When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
Display key battery the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
General information e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
Follow the following information:
the tray together with the device, they may
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
declines, the display is switched off auto- and risk of damage to property. When charg-
matically. The battery must be recharged ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
so that the display can be switched back objects on the tray together with the device.
on. The operability of the standard buttons
is retained until the battery is completely
discharged. Charging
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first Via USB
time or if the key has not been used for an Connect the display key via the micro-USB
extended period. charging interface to a USB port.
▷ The display key can be used while it is be-
ing charged via the USB port. If the battery
is fully discharged, it may take some time
before the display key can be used again.
75
In the center console ▷ The battery of the display key is dis-

charged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity.
1. Open the tray cover. ▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
2. Place the display key into the middle of the process of mobile devices, for instance
wireless charging tray in front of the cup charging of a mobile phone.
holders. Do not transport the display key together with
Ensure that the display is facing up. metal objects or electronic devices.
3. Close the tray cover. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
LED displays the mechanical key.
Color Meaning Turning on drive-ready state via

emergency detection of the BMW
Blue The display key is charging.
display key
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Or- The display key is not charging.

ange Temperature on the display key
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
Red The display key is not charging.

Contact an authorized service center
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
or another qualified service center or
state if the display key has not been detected.
repair shop.
Proceed as follows in this case:
Malfunction 1. Hold the display key with its rear against

the mark on the steering column. Pay at-
General information tention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
2. If the display key is detected:
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances: Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
76
If the display key is not detected, slightly

change the position of the display key and re- Warning
peat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
If the charged display key cannot be turned on following actions:
anymore or if the display does not respond to ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Press and hold the following buttons on the
display key at the same time for at least ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
10 seconds until the display is switched off and dows.
then on again: ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
Access to vehicle interior Actions during unlocking

Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
Safety information cle:
▷ Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
Warning will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the will be unlocked.
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. ▷ The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. ▷ The welcome light can be turned on when
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve- the vehicle is being unlocked.
hicle can be opened from the outside.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
▷ If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
Warning
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
For some national-market versions, unlock- profile will be activated.
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
ticular knowledge.
they were manually switched off.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
exterior mirrors are folded out.
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
when there are people in it. button in the vehicle interior, they will not
be folded out during unlocking.
77
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off. If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
▷ The alarm system is switched off. been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
▷ Settings, refer to page 90.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
▷ Welcome lights, refer to page 158. cle is ready for operation.
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63. The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func- Locking the vehicle
tions are performed when locking the vehicle: 1. Close the driver's door.
▷ The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
All vehicle access points are locked.
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers On the external door handle
are switched on.
Principle
▷ Pathway lighting can be activated during
locking. The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The following functions are executed:
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
the vehicle.
are locked.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. This General information
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
The function is available with Comfort Access.
ing the lock button or door opener.
▷ The alarm system is switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
pants pocket.
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
button. outside of the vehicle near the doors.
Additional information: ▷ After locking, approx. 2 seconds must

elapse before unlocking is possible.
Settings, refer to page 90.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.
78
Unlock vehicle When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
Fully grasp the handle of a door. of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear
of the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
1. Close the driver's door.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
2. When a door is closed, touch the grooved approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of
surface on the door handle with your finger the vehicle.
for approx. 1 second without gripping the
handle. If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
If a passenger is detected in the front passen-
ger seat during locking and the seat belt of
the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt
buckle during locking:
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Malfunction
Actions during unlocking
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the external door han- If the settings specify that only the driver's
dles. door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,
note the following:
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only
or use the integrated key. be unlocked when the driver approaches the
vehicle on the driver's side.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the Additional information:
vehicle Settings, refer to page 90.
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
79
Functional requirements Locking/unlocking the vehicle

▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking
zone, the doors and cargo area must be
closed.
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and cargo area must be closed.
▷ Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
Hold activated Key Card directly on the center
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
of the external door handle of the driver's door.
▷ For contactless locking of the vehicle, no
second vehicle key may be within a radius When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle. make sure that all doors and the trunk are
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for closed.
several days, contactless unlocking/locking If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
will only be available after the vehicle has the position of the Key Card and repeat the
been driven. procedure.
With the BMW Digital Key
With the Key Card Principle

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
Principle market version, a digital key can be installed
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
lock and lock the vehicle.
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle. Additional information:
Additional information: BMW Digital Key, refer to page 86.
Key Card, refer to page 84.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Hold the near field communication antenna of

the smartphone directly and centered on the
external door handle of the driver's door. The
80
position of the near field communication an-

tenna depends on the smartphone model. NOTICE
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone, During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
make sure that all doors and the trunk are up. There is a risk of damage to property.
closed. Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to With the vehicle key
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key? General information
▷ The app’s remote services offer the option To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
to lock and unlock a vehicle. do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
This requires an active BMW Connected- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
Drive contract, and the app must be instal- market version, the following settings can be
led on a smartphone. changed:
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via ▷ Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center. key also unlocks the doors.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is ▷ Before unlocking the cargo area with the
required. vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
Access to the cargo area
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
General information
You must enable the setting for opening with
It may not be possible to open the cargo area the vehicle key.
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Valet parking mode, refer to page 89.
Opening the trunk
Safety information
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
On the trunk
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear during opening and closing. General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
81
Functional prerequisite ▷ Press the button on the trunk.

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Press the button on the trunk.
Opening the trunk The vehicle is locked after closing
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-
er's door must be closed and the vehicle
key must be outside of the vehicle near the
cargo area.
In the interior
Functional prerequisite
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but- area using the button in the vehicle interior.
ton on the trunk.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key Opening the trunk
with you and press the button on the trunk.
Press the button in the driver's door.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
Closing the cargo area manually

Pull down the cargo area using the recessed Closing the cargo area
grips. Depending on the equipment:
Depending on the equipment: press Press the button in the driver's door.
the button on the cargo area.
The vehicle is locked after closing the
cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is
closed and the vehicle key must be outside of closed.
the vehicle near the cargo area.
Interruption of the opening
procedure
Closing the cargo area automatically
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
82
Pressing the button again continues the If contactless opening is used for the cargo
opening process. area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the Safety information
opening procedure.
Warning
Interruption of the closing procedure
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol- be touched, such as the hot exhaust system.
lowing situations: There is a risk of injury. When moving your
▷ If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move- foot, make sure you have a firm stance and
ment. do not touch the vehicle.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again. Warning
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of Body parts can be jammed when operating
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
cargo area again. sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door. clear during opening and closing.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
NOTICE
Opening and closing the cargo area During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
contactlessly up. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid
Principle is clear during opening and closing.
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo
area is possible when carrying the vehicle key
on your person. Functional requirements
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot ▷ To open the cargo area contactlessly, no
movement in the central rear area and the towing hitch can be mounted.
cargo area is opened and closed. ▷ To open the cargo area contactlessly, se-
lector lever position P must be engaged.
General information ▷ Contactless opening and closing of the
Function availability depends on vehicle equip- trunk must be activated in the settings.
ment and national-market version. Additional information:
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the Settings, refer to page 90.
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
83
Opening the cargo area area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle.
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle. Malfunction
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
direction and immediately pull it back. With ate the unlocked trunk manually with a slow
this movement, the leg must pass through and smooth motion.
the ranges of both sensors.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-

ing system flashes. Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc- The trunk is unlocked.
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
close the cargo area again.
Key Card
Closing the cargo area
Perform the foot movement for opening the
Principle
cargo area.
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
The hazard warning system flashes and an
and locked, as well as started.
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc- General information
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
the cargo area again.
ment and national-market version.
System limits A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
The detection of the foot movement may be
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
limited due to the following external conditions:
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
Card or take the Key Card with you because
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. the active Key Card can be used to start the
Movement in range of the sensors may cause vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
unintended opening of the cargo area, for in- a service appointment.
stance due to water running down when clean-
ing the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To pre-
vent such unintended opening of the cargo
84
Safety information Deactivating Key Card

1. Apps menu
NOTICE 2. "Vehicle apps"
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the 3. "Doors and windows"
wireless charging tray at the same time, the 4. "Digital Key"
Key Card could become damaged. There is a 5. "Key Card"
risk of damage to property. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the 6. "Deactivate Key Card"
same time as a mobile device. A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in Unlocking and locking the vehicle

the vehicle The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
General information Additional information:
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
Turning on the drive-ready state
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Activating Key Card
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray. Malfunction

2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart- The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
phone tray. may be disrupted by objects between the sen-
sors and the Key Card, such as a wallet or a
3. Follow instructions on the control display.
smartphone cover.
85
BMW Digital Key Functional requirements

▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
Principle
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone. ▷ The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
General information sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
Enabling the main digital key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
devices.
hicle for this purpose.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
You can begin the authorization process us-
smartphone, this function must be offered by
ing the My BMW app or using your activation
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
code in the corresponding smartphone func-
app can be used to check if the smartphone
tion, e.g., the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
must be in the vehicle during activation.
tions are supported.
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
Key menu in the app or on the control display.
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a Digital Key,
Sharing digital keys
always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-
General information
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to with other people. This option is available via
be handed over to another person. You can the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card key. This function must be supported by the
instead of your smartphone. smartphone.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment. Forwarding authorization
Additional information: To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63. the Wallet app.
▷ Key Card, refer to page 84. As soon as a digital key is shared with another
▷ www.bmw.com/digitalkey person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
86
Limiting the range of functions Deletion via iDrive

Certain functions of the digital key can be lim- To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
switch-off for driving stability control systems tray.
can be disabled and the engine power can
1. Apps menu
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Authentication 4. "Digital Key"
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone 5. If necessary, select the digital key.
model, an authentication may be required for
6. Delete the Digital Key.
security and safety reasons.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
Resetting the function
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
on the smartphone or the control display. thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
Deleting digital keys When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
General information will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not
deleted.
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys. After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
Deleting the main digital key be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
The main digital key can be deleted from the 1. Apps menu
smartphone or via iDrive. 2. "Vehicle apps"
The deletion of the main digital key is com- 3. "Doors and windows"
pleted immediately.
4. "Digital Key"
Deleting a shared key 5. "Reset function"
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-

phone with the master Digital Key, using the
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted, The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using
or via iDrive. the external door handle.
The deletion via the smartphone using the Additional information:
main digital key will not be performed until the Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
If the smartphone associated with a shared
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
87
Turning on the drive-ready state System limits

The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
Using the smartphone tray sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Alarm system, refer to page 91.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
that is not suitable.
2. Place smartphone in the center of the
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
smartphone tray.
are located between the smartphone and
Ensure that the display is facing up. the smartphone cover.
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray. ▷ Fault of the connection from transmission
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the towers or other equipment with high trans-
drive-ready state. mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
Sale of the smartphone ings or metal objects.
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the Buttons for the central
vehicle. locking system
Changing smartphones
General information
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
ing off.
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
smartphone is activated. is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is
not deleted.
88
Overview Valet parking mode

Principle
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
The central locking buttons are located on the Depending on the national-market version, the
front door. valet parking mode may not be available.
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-
Locking the vehicle tions:
Press the button with the front doors ▷ Vehicle settings cannot be changed via
closed. iDrive.
▷ Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. file cannot be changed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when ▷ Personal data cannot be displayed.
locking. ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
Unlocking the vehicle deactivated.
Press the button. ▷ Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned
off.
▷ The availability of certain settings of the
Opening the door driving modes is limited.
▷ Press the button to unlock all the Additional information:

doors. BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Pull the door opener above the arm-
rest. Functional requirement
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
door to open the door. The other doors re- BMW ID.
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle Activating the valet parking mode
on the door to be opened; the first time 1. Apps menu
unlocks the door, the second time opens it. 2. "Vehicle apps"
The other doors remain locked.
4. "Valet parking mode"
The cargo area is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
5. If necessary, "PIN"
89
If the active BMW ID does not have an as- Touchless unlocking/locking

signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The 1. Apps menu
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
ing mode. 2. "Vehicle apps"
6. If necessary, enter the PIN. 3. "Doors and windows"
7. "Activate valet parking mode" 4. "Comfort access"

Deactivating valet parking mode
Automatic unlocking
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen. 1. Apps menu
2. ▷ Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID. 2. "Vehicle apps"
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the 3. "Doors and windows"
access data for the BMW ID. 4. "Lock/unlock"
▷ If the selected BMW ID does not have 5. Select the desired setting:
an assigned PIN: enter the access data ▷ "Unlock doors at end of trip"
for the BMW ID.
▷ "Unlock doors when in P"
After drive-ready state is switched off, the
Settings locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pressing the start/stop button or engaging se-
lector lever position P.
General information
Depending on the equipment and national- Automatic locking
market version, various settings for opening
1. Apps menu
and closing are possible.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Unlocking and locking 3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Doors 5. "Lock after a short time"
1. Apps menu The vehicle locks automatically after a short
2. "Vehicle apps" period of time if no door is opened after un-
3. "Doors and windows" locking.
4. "Lock/unlock"
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
5. "Unlock"
1. Apps menu
6. Select the desired setting:
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un- 4. "Lock/unlock"
locks the entire vehicle. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "All doors" ▷ "Flash on lock/unlock"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
90
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice, Opening/closing the cargo area

locking by flashing once. contactlessly
▷ With alarm system: 1. Apps menu
"Sound on lock/unlock" 2. "Vehicle apps"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound 3. "Doors and windows"
signals, locking is confirmed with one
4. "Tailgate"
sound signal.
Folding mirrors in automatically
1. Apps menu Alarm system
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows" Principle
4. "Lock/unlock" The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock" signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
Cargo area
General information
Cargo area and doors When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
1. Apps menu system reacts to the following changes:
2. "Vehicle apps" ▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo
3. "Doors and windows" area.
4. "Tailgate" ▷ Movements in the interior.
5. Select the desired setting: ▷ Changes in the vehicle inclination, such

as during attempts at stealing a wheel or
▷ "Tailgate" when towing the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the cargo ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
area will be unlocked or opened.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" board diagnostics.
Depending on the equipment, the trunk ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
will be unlocked or opened and the nected to the diagnostic socket.
doors are unlocked.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
▷ "Tailgate will only open if vehicle is ally and acoustically:
already unlocked"
▷ Acoustic alarm:
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the Depending on local regulations, the acous-
vehicle key. tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ "Lock tailgate button" ▷ Optical alarm:
Operating the cargo area with the vehi- By flashing of the hazard warning system
cle key is disabled. and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
91
Turning the alarm system on/off Indicator light on the interior mirror
The alarm system is activated or deactivated
as soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
If the vehicle is locked remotely using the My
BMW app, the alarm system is not switched
on.
Opening the doors with the alarm

system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
integrated key in the door lock. 2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
Opening the cargo area with the ▷ The indicator light flashes for approx.
alarm system switched on 10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
The cargo area can be opened even when the 2 seconds:
alarm system is switched on. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
be locked and monitored again. The hazard are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
warning system flashes once during closing. access points are secured.
When the remaining open access points
Panic mode are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation. ▷ The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Alarm system error.
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession. The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
To switch off the alarm: press any button. until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor

The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor

The vehicle interior is monitored.
92
The alarm system responds when movement

is detected in the vehicle interior.
Window
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
General information
When a window is frequently opened to the
Avoiding unintentional alarms same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is
General information useful if you frequently use the same parking
garage, for example.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau- Additional information:
thorized action occurred. BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: page 51.
▷ In car washes.
Safety information
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
Warning
at sea or on a trailer.
When operating the windows, body parts and
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of re- jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
fueling. that the travel path of the windows is clear
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion during opening and closing.
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and With the vehicle key
interior motion sensor
Opening windows
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi- Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle is locked. cle key after unlocking.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
The windows open for as long as the button
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
on the vehicle key is pressed.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked Closing the windows
again.
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
Ending the alarm ing.
Unlock the vehicle.
The windows close for as long as the button
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
on the vehicle key is pressed.
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
the vehicle key. mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
93
On the external door handle In the interior
Principle Overview
The windows can be closed using the external
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in Power windows
your pants pocket.
Closing the windows

▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside
of the vehicle.
Opening windows
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
Touch the grooved surface on the external The window opens while the switch
door handle of a closed door with your finger is being held.
and hold it there without grasping the door ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist-
handle. ance point.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass The window opens automatically.
sunroof with sun protection will be closed. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded Closing the windows
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are point.
switched on. The window closes while the switch
is being held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
94
Jam protection system Glass sunroof

Principle
Safety information
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being Warning
closed. Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
General information Make sure that the area of movement of the
If resistance or blockage is detected while a glass sunroof is clear during opening and
window is being closed, the closing will be in- closing.
terrupted.
Safety information With the vehicle key
Opening glass sunroof

Warning
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
cle key after unlocking.
nas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
area of movement of the windows. opened for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Closing without the jam protection

Closing glass sunroof
system
In case of danger from the outside or if icing With Comfort Access: press and hold
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol- the button on the vehicle key in close
lows: range of the vehicle after locking.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be

closed for as long as the button on the vehicle
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
key is pressed.
point and hold it there.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
The window closes with limited jam protec-
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
switched on.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and On the external door handle
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection. Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed using the ex-
ternal door handle without operating the vehi-
cle key.
95
The vehicle key is automatically detected near General information

the vehicle. The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access. Overview
Functional prerequisite Button in the vehicle

Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in
your pants pocket.
Closing glass sunroof
Opening/closing the glass sun-

roof/sun protection.
Touch the grooved surface on the external

door handle of a closed door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the door Lifting/closing glass sunroof
handle.
Push switch briefly upward.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
and the sun protection opens
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior slightly.
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
switched on.
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
In the interior
Functional requirements Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

The glass sunroof and sun protection can be sun protection separately
operated under the following conditions. ▷ Slide switch back to the re-
▷ Standby state is switched on. sistance point and hold.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. Holding down the switch
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
96
fully open, the glass sunroof Comfort position

opens.
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
and hold. not fully open. In these models, the automatic
The glass sunroof closes while the switch function initially only opens the glass sunroof
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already up to this comfort position.
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro- Pressing the switch in the vehicle interior again
tection closes. opens the glass sunroof fully.
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
point. Jam protection system
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the Principle
glass sunroof opens automatically. The jam protection prevents objects or body
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. parts from becoming jammed between the
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance roof frame and glass sunroof while the glass
point. sunroof is closing.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If

General information
the glass sunroof is already closed or in
the tilted position, the sun protection closes If a resistance or blockage is detected while
automatically. the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-
ing from the tilted position.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together Closing from the open position without
jam protection
▷ Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
the rear past the resistance closure, proceed as follows:
point.
The glass sunroof and sun
protection open together.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
1. Close all doors.
▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-
sion toward the front past the resistance 2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
point. ing vehicle.
The glass sunroof and sun protection close 3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
together. point and hold.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
4. Push the switch forward again past the re-
sistance point and hold until the glass sun-
97
roof closes without jam protection. Make Initializing the system

sure that the closing path is clear.
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
Closing from the lifted position without
plete:
jam protection
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
lows:
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
▷ The sun protection is initialized in the
1. Close all doors. closed position.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov- Initialization is complete once the glass sun-
ing vehicle. roof and the sun protection have opened then
closed again.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power interruption during the opening
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the
system can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The outside temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
98
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
ment, systems, and functions that are currently the protective effect of the seat belt can no
available, or may become available in the fu- longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
Additional information: risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
Sitting safely ing.
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of

the occupants can make a vital contribution to Warning
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. There is a danger of jamming when moving
In the event of an accident, the correct seat the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
position plays an important role. Follow the in- of damage to property. Make sure that the
formation in the following chapters. travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
▷ Seats, refer to page 99.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 104. Manually adjustable seats
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 106.
Overview
▷ Airbags, refer to page 165.
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con- The levers for setting the seats are located on
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident. the front seats.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
99
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Setting the longitudinal direction Adjusting the height
Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. Ve-
hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. After adjusting, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly, making sure the seat
engages properly.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed until the seat has reached the desired
height.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired

direction.
Adjusting seat tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed until the seat has reached the desired
inclination.
100
Overview Adjusting seat tilt
The switches for setting the seats are located Tilt switch up or down.
on the front seats.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Setting the longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.

Press switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
Adjusting the height automatically
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function

Press switch up or down. 1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Set automatically"
101
Thigh support Backrest width
Sport seat Principle

Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Adjusting the backrest width

▷ Press the front section of the but-
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push ton:
the thigh support forward or back.
The backrest width decreases.
▷ Press the rear section of the button:
Lumbar support The backrest width increases.
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad- Functional limitations
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
region of the spine. The lower back and the width at very high and very low temperatures.
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Entering the rear
Adjusting the lumbar support
▷ Press the front/rear section of the Safety information
button:
The curvature is increased/de- Warning
creased. There is a danger of jamming when moving
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the but- the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
ton: of damage to property. Make sure that the
The curvature is shifted up/down. travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar Warning
support at very high and very low tempera-
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
tures.
backrest while driving may occur if the rear
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold
back and lock the backrests before driving.
Make sure the backrest engages correctly by
slightly moving forward and back.
102
Manual longitudinal setting Push the seat backrest rearward

Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
1. Pull lever up to the stop. position that was stored.
Calibrating the front seats
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward. Safety information
Push the seat backrest rearward

Warning
1. Push the seat back into the initial position.
There is a danger of jamming when moving
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
Electric longitudinal setting travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Calibrating the front seat
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward until the seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward again until the
seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
2. Fold the seat backrest forward. bration.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat If the message is still shown after repeated
will automatically move to the most forward calibration, have the vehicle checked by a
position. qualified authorized service center or another
The process will be terminated when the qualified service center or repair shop.
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
103
Seat belts
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
General information
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en- is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
sure occupant safety. However, they can only danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
offer protection when adjusted correctly. belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
Warning
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts. The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the ▷ The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
correct seat settings. damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 99.
nism were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
Safety information
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Do not modify seat
Warning belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt tension-
ers, roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors and
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
keep them clean. After an accident, have the
person will potentially defeat the ability of
seat belts checked by an authorized service
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
center or another qualified service center or
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
repair shop.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child
Correct use of seat belts
restraint systems. ▷ Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷ Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
Warning your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat ▷ Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju- or fragile objects.
ries, for instance in the event of an accident, ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk ▷ Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all around your upper body area.
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
104
Seat-belt extender Jam protection system
Principle Warning
The seat-belt extender makes it easier to put
When extending and retracting the seat-belt
on the seat belt.
extender, body parts and objects can be jam-
med. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
General information age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat-belt extender is clear.
If the belt carrier encounters resistance when

extending or retracting, the seat-belt extender
moves back somewhat in the respective op-
posite. Following an attempt, the seat-belt ex-
tender will stop in this position.
To reactivate the seat-belt extender, eliminate
the resistance and open and close the respec-
The seat-belt extender extends automatically tive door.
and keeps the seat belt ready to put on, arrow.
After the belt is put on, it goes back into the Buckling the seat belt
resting position. 1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
If the seat belt has not yet been applied, the
seat-belt extender goes back under the follow- 2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
ing circumstances: buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
▷ Waiting period of approx. five minutes.
▷ Opening the respective door.
▷ After a short distance travelled.
▷ Locking the vehicle from the outside.
When the respective door is closed, the seat-
belt extender extends again.
▷ Door is closed.
▷ Vehicle key detected in the car's interior. To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Unbuckling the seat belt

1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
105
Seat belt reminder General information

If a door with access to the rear row seating
General information is operated within 30 minutes before starting
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned off, a message appears on the control display
correctly. when the trip is completed and a signal tone
sounds.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations: If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the
message is displayed again after the trip has
▷ When the seat belt on the driver's side or
been completed.
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
▷ When the seat belt is unfastened while driv- Activate/deactivate the function
ing.
1. Apps menu
▷ When objects are lying on a seat.
Display in the instrument cluster 3. "Rear Occupant Alert"
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu- 4. Select the desired setting.
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active. Safety mode
A Check Control message is displayed where In critical driving situations, for instance during
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has emergency braking, the front seat belts tighten
been fastened correctly. automatically.
Icon Meaning If the driving situation passes without an acci-

dent occurring, the belt tension relaxes.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
not buckled.
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat
belt using the red button in the seat belt
Seat belt on the passenger buckle. Fasten the seat belt before continuing
seat or another seat in the ve- to drive.
hicle is not buckled.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-

responding seat. Front head restraints
Seat belt is not buckled on the Safety information
corresponding seat.
Warning
Rear Occupant Alert Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
Principle neck area. There is a risk of injury.
At the end of a trip, the system informs the
driver of the possible presence of occupants on
the rear seats.
106
▷ Before driving, install the removed head Adjusting the height

restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

Warning
push the head restraint down.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when After setting the height, make sure that the
moving the head restraint. head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: M sport seat

Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint. Press switch up or down.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance

pillows, while driving.
107
Adjusting the distance Removing the head restraints: M

Sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Installing head restraints

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Exterior mirrors
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
General information
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
front.
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
head restraint engages correctly.
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination. The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Safety information
Removing the head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Warning
sitting in the seat in question. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-

sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
108
Overview Folding in/folding out the exterior

mirrors
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.

Icon Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.

Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Adjust the exterior mirrors. Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb ▷ On narrow roads.
Monitor.
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the button. Automatic heating
The selected exterior mirror moves Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
along with the button movement. as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Selecting the exterior mirror
Automatic dimming
To change over to the other mirror:
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
Slide the switch. tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
Automatic Curb Monitor
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass. Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
109
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor Overview
1. slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb

Monitor
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
dimmable ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior

mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
ror, flip the lever forward.
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Interior mirror, automatic

dimming feature Manual steering wheel adjustment
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
1. Fold the lever down completely.

2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
110
red height and angle to suit your seat posi- The following settings are not stored:
tion. ▷ Backrest width.
3. Fold the lever back up. ▷ Lumbar support.
Steering wheel heating Safety information

Overview
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Warning
Button for steering wheel heating
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
Turning the steering wheel heating of damage to property. Make sure that the
on/off travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
Press the button. adjustment.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes Overview
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
heating turns on automatically if the function
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
The memory buttons are located on the front
tion:
doors.
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
111
Storing settings
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-

nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
Seat climate control

Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Climate operation, refer to page 244.
112
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
ment, systems, and functions that are currently restraint systems and their components to
available, or may become available in the fu- become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. injuries when touching the hot components.
Additional information: There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
The right place for children transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Safety information
Children in the rear seat
Warning
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
following actions: Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
▷ Releasing the parking brake. tems designed for the age, weight and size
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
dows. must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Safety information
exiting and lock the vehicle. Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
Warning suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons, seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
especially children, or animals. There is a belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
persons, especially children, or animals unat- ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
tended in the vehicle. braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
113
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child Safety information

restraint systems.
Warning
Children on the front passenger The protective effect of child restraint sys-
seat tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
General information can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
Before using a child restraint system on the
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
of injury or danger to life.
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated. Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
If attachment systems have been damaged
airbags, refer to page 167.
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
Safety information
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air- Warning
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. The stability of the child restraint system is
Make sure that the front passenger airbags limited or compromised with incorrect seat
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER setting or improper installation of the child
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates. seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
Installing child restraint just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
systems seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re- On the front passenger seat
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems. Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
114
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER Child seat security

AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Before installing a child restraint system in the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 167.
The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
Seat position and height senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
After installing a child restraint system, move fasten child restraint systems.
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest
position. This seat position and height ensure Locking the seat belt
the best possible position for the belt and of- 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci- 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
dent. seat belt.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys- 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that it tight against the child restraint system.
the belt is not constrained. The seat belt is disabled.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the belt guide of the child Unlocking the seat belt
restraint seat, move the front passenger seat 1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
carefully forward until the best possible belt
2. Remove the child restraint system.
guide position is reached.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
Backrest width pletely.
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
LATCH child restraint fixing
not change the backrest width again and do system
not call up a memory position.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
ing systems.
115
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Mounts for lower anchors Position
General information Icon Meaning

The lower anchors may be used to attach the The corresponding icon shows
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child the mounts for the lower
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child LATCH anchors.
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
Safety information pair (2) of LATCH icons.
For vehicles equipped with a
Warning middle seat:
If the lower mountings of the child restraint It is not recommended to use
system are not correctly engaged, the protec- the inner lower mountings of
tive effect of the child restraint system is lim- standard outer LATCH posi-
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to tions to fasten a child restraint
life. Make sure that the lower mountings are system on the middle seat.
correctly engaged and that the child restraint Use the vehicle seat belt in-
system fits securely against the backrest. stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint

Warning systems
The mounts for the lower mountings and at- Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
tachment points of the child restraint system child seat mountings.
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the Installing child restraint systems
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- 1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
age to property. Only attach child restraint turer's information.
systems at the corresponding mounts for the 2. Make sure that the child restraint system
lower mountings or attachment points. mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
Child restraint systems with

tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
116
Safety information Attachment points for upper

retaining strap
Warning
Icon Meaning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective The respective icon shows the
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En- attachment point for the upper
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided retaining strap. Seats with an
to the upper attachment point without twist- upper top tether are marked
ing and not over sharp edges. with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the Routing the retaining strap
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Warning 1 Driving direction

The mounts for the lower mountings and at- 2 Upper retaining strap
tachment points of the child restraint system
3 Head restraint
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the 4 Rear shelf
mounts or attachment points can be dam- 5 Attachment point
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- 6 Hook for upper retaining strap
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points. Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
4. Tighten the retaining strap.
117
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
available, or may become available in the fu- General information
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. After each engine start using the Start/Stop
Additional information: button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. The function is activated at low speeds.
Engine stop
Start/Stop button
Principle The engine is switched off automatically when
stopping under the following conditions:
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-
ready state on or off. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
General information ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
Drive-ready state is switched on when you de- the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/ held by Automatic Hold.
Stop button. ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches er's door is closed.
the drive-ready state back off and standby
state is switched back on. Manual engine stop
Additional information: If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
be switched off manually:
▷ Standby state, refer to page 41.
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
Driving off
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
2. Apply gear position. the engine switches off.
3. Driving off.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
Auto Start/Stop function The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
118
Driving CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.

The display in the instrument ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
cluster indicates that the Auto the accelerator pedal.
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start. Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.
Functional limitations Safety mode

The engine is not switched off automatically in After the engine switches off automatically, it
the following situations: will not start again automatically if any one of
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. the following conditions are met:
▷ The brake pedal was not pressed hard ▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
enough. driver's door is open.
▷ When the ambient temperature is high and ▷ Hood was unlocked.
automatic climate control is switched on. Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
▷ The vehicle interior has not yet been length of time.
heated or cooled as desired. The engine can only be started via the Start/
▷ When window condensation is possible and Stop button.
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ Engine or other parts are not at operating
System limits
temperature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
▷ With excessive warming of the interior
steering wheel is being turned.
when cooling is turned on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ With excessive cooling of the interior when
▷ At higher elevations. heating is turned on.
▷ Hood is unlocked. ▷ When window condensation is possible and
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti- automatic climate control is switched on.
vated. ▷ Without mild hybrid technology:
▷ For stop-and-go traffic. In case of a steering operation.
▷ Selector lever in position N, S, or R. ▷ When changing selector lever position from
▷ After driving in reverse. D or P.
▷ Using fuel with high ethanol content. ▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
Starting the engine ▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Functional requirements Deactivating the system manually

The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions: Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
119
CONTROLS Driving
The engine is started during an automatic en- Switching off the vehicle during an
gine stop. automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
Without mild hybrid technology: via
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
button
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
Press the button.
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
function is deactivated.
▷ LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena- Malfunction
bled. The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Without mild hybrid technology: via Control message is displayed. You may con-
iDrive tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
Steptronic transmission
5. "Auto Start/Stop"
Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
Via selector lever position automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled
in selector lever position S.
Safety information
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti- Warning
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
Dynamics Control. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling away, e.g. by applying the
parking brake.
120
Driving CONTROLS
Selector lever positions Engaging selector lever positions
Gear position D General information

Selector lever position for normal driving. All To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
gears for forward travel are activated automat- you select a gear position or reverse, main-
ically. tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
R reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the Functional requirements
vehicle is stationary. Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
N Neutral to change from selector lever position P to an-
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without other selector lever position.
power, for instance in car washes, in selector The selection lever position P cannot be
lever position N. changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Parking position P
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
General information R
Selector lever position, for instance for parking 1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive 2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
in selector lever position P. direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
Engage selector lever position P only when the The selector lever automatically returns to
vehicle is stationary. the center position when released.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
▷ After standby is switched off, if selector
lever position N is engaged.
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened, without pressing
the brake pedal, while the vehicle is station-
ary and selector lever position D, S, or R is
engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle may begin to move.
Parking brake, refer to page 127.
121
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging selector lever position P Selector lever position P is engaged automati-

cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 123.
Press button P. Kickdown

The transmission lock is engaged. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to S Sport mode
roll without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed. Principle
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Engaging selector lever position N Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en- Activating the Sport program
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and
switch off Automatic Hold.
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-
3. Depress the brake pedal.
tion D to D/S.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
5. Switch off drive-ready state. ment cluster, for instance S1.
In this way, standby state remains switched The sport program of the transmission is acti-
on, and a Check Control message is dis- vated.
played.
The vehicle can roll.
122
Driving CONTROLS
Ending the Sport program General information

Pull the selector lever to D/S.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
Displays in the instrument cluster road speeds.
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
The selector lever position is
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
displayed, for example P.
speed limits are reached.
Temporary manual mode

In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
Electronic unlocking of the dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
transmission lock The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
General information After conservative driving in manual mode
Unlock the transmission lock electroni- without acceleration or shifting via the shift
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a paddles for a certain amount of time, the
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction. transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
with a wheel chock. ▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Engaging selector lever position N ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three pull the left shift paddle.
times without stepping on the brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal. Continuous manual mode
3. Press the selector lever to position N. In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M permanently.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Position N is indicated on the selector lever.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away. ▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
Shift paddles pull the left shift paddle.
▷ Pull the selector lever to D/S.
Principle When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are stationary, the transmission will no longer shift
used to change gears manually. back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode
M is exited.
123
CONTROLS Driving
Shifting Launch Control

Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
▷ Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
very heavy load for the vehicle.
▷ Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in- with Launch Control.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Advanced mode Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 270.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step- Functional requirement
tronic Sport transmission offers an advanced
Launch Control can be used when the engine
mode with adapted shift characteristics.
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
▷ Automatic downshift to lowest possible operating temperature after an uninterrupted
gear. trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts Driving off with Launch Control
down to the lowest possible gear.
▷ Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
2. Press the button.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when 3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.
speed limits are reached. 4. Engage selector lever position S.
▷ There is no downshifting for kickdown. 5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
Enabling advanced mode 6. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
Advanced mode is active in manual mode. beyond the resistance point at the full throt-
"SPORT": The driving mode must be selected tle position, kickdown.
and configured depending on vehicle equip- A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
ment. ment cluster.
124
Driving CONTROLS
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait Activating

briefly until the engine speed is constant.
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-
8. Release the brake within 3 seconds after ter.
the destination flag illuminates.
▷ The transmission shifts down to the
The vehicle accelerates. lowest possible gear and switches to
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as manual operation M.
the destination flag is displayed and the ac- ▷ A dynamic setting has been activated
celerator pedal is not released. for the drivetrain.
2. Change gears manually.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans- Automatic deactivation
mission must cool down for a short time before
The Sprint function is ended automatically
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
when driving moderately for a defined period
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
of time.
when used again.
Manual deactivation
After using Launch Control
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-
Stability Control as soon as possible.
ment cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
System limits
pull the left shift paddle.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
▷ Press the selector lever from selector lever
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
position S to D.
Launch Control mode.
Steptronic Sport Driving Dynamics Control

transmission: sprint function Principle
The Driving Dynamics Control influences,
Principle among other things, the vehicle's driving dy-
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func- namics.
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv- situation using various driving modes.
etrain for the acceleration process.
General information
General information
The following systems may be affected, for in-
When the Sprint function is activated, the re- stance:
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-
come more dynamic. ▷ Drivetrain.
▷ Chassis.
▷ Steering.
125
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Display in the instrument cluster. Driving modes in detail

▷ Cruise control.
COMFORT
Overview The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
Buttons in the vehicle mized driving.
SPORT
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
SPORT PLUS
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
drive.
Button Driving mode
ECO PRO
SPORT In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-
SPORT PLUS timized.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
INDIVIDUAL configuration
COMFORT
General information
ECO PRO For some driving modes, there is another
mode that can be adjusted individually.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
The individual configuration set last is acti-
vated directly when the driving mode is called
Displays in the instrument cluster up again.
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus- Configuring and resetting
ter. E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Activating/deactivating drive modes 3. "Driving settings"
Press the button for the desired drive mode 4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis- 5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
played in the instrument cluster. 6. Select the desired setting.
When changing the drive mode, the current Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
drive mode is deactivated. settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
126
Driving CONTROLS
Enabling INDIVIDUAL There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not

Press the button for the desired driving mode leave children or animals unattended in the
several times. vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
Parking brake
Overview
Principle Button in the vehicle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away. Parking brake
▷ Set the parking brake. Setting the parking brake
turn the front wheels in the direction of With a stationary vehicle
the curb.
Pull the switch.
The LED illuminates.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red.
The parking brake is set.
Warning
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger While driving
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Use while driving serves as an emergency
following actions: braking function.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
▷ Releasing the parking brake. brakes hard while the switch is being
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- pulled.
dows.
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
▷ Using vehicle equipment. and the brake lights illuminate.
127
CONTROLS Driving
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi- 1. Turn on standby state.
cle is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant 2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
Briefly pull the switch to trigger the
set and then push.
Emergency Stop Assistant.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 185. ess are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi-
Releasing the parking brake nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Releasing the parking brake manually
Automatic Hold
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P Principle
is set. Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
The LED and the indicator light go out. cally setting and releasing the brake, such as
The parking brake is released. when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
Releasing the parking brake it is stationary.
automatically On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
The parking brake is released automatically cle from rolling back when driving off.
when you drive off.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged
Malfunction under the following conditions:
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se- ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi-
before you exit. cle is stationary.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in- still using the parking brake.
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle. Safety information
After a power interruption Warning

To reestablish parking brake operability after An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
a power interruption, an initialization may be possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
required. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
128
Driving CONTROLS
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Overview

▷ Set the parking brake. Button in the vehicle
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle Automatic Hold
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Activating Automatic Hold
▷ Releasing the parking brake. 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows. 2. Press the button.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The LED illuminates.
▷ Using vehicle equipment. The indicator light illuminates green.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Automatic Hold is activated.
After every vehicle restart, the last se-
lected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle

NOTICE Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold door is closed.
engages the parking brake and prevents the After stopping, the vehicle is automat-
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a ically secured against rolling away as
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto- soon as the indicator light illuminates
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash. green.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
129
CONTROLS Driving
Automatic parking brake application Flashing

The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if

the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is Press the lever past the resistance point.
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Deactivate Automatic Hold Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.
Press the button.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
The LED goes out.
1. Apps menu
The indicator light goes out.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
Automatic Hold is switched off. 4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, 5. "One-touch turn signal"
also press on the brake pedal when switching 6. Select the desired setting.
off.
Brief flashing
Turn signal Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold High beams,
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
130
Driving CONTROLS
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams illuminate when the low Turning on window wiper system
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

cluster illuminates when the high
beams are turned on.
Window wiper system

Press the lever up until the desired position is
Safety information reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
Warning
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a When the journey is interrupted with the win-
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off continues, the wipers resume at their previous
when the wipers are in the folded-away state speed.
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not use the wipers when
the window is dry.
131
CONTROLS Driving
Turning off the window wiper Activating rain sensor

system and flick wipe
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-

Press the lever down. row 1.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down until it Wiping operation is started.
reaches the 0 position. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
position. start.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released. Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position.
Rain sensor
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity

of the rain sensor.
NOTICE ▷ Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers ▷ Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Windshield washer system blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view. If the wipers start moving in the folded away
There is a risk of accident. Only use the state, body parts can be jammed or damage
washer systems if the washer fluid cannot may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
needed. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
NOTICE
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the washer If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
fluid reservoir is empty. the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
Cleaning the windshield the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
133
CONTROLS Driving
Folding out the wipers

1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the

windshield.
Folding in the wipers

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
134
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle features and options center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi- Instrument cluster
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperatures as well as indicator and warning Display ranges on the instrument
lights.
cluster
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
1 Speedometer
Safety information
2 Driver assistance systems 198
3 Driver Attention Camera 193
Warning
4 Check Control 145
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail,
do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk Selector lever display 120
of accidents or risk of damage to property. Gear shift indicator 146
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe man- Selection lists 146
ner. If drive-ready state is switched off and
Using ECO PRO efficiently 277
on again, the malfunction may be rectified
and it may be possible to continue driving. 5 Power gauge 147
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, have Tachometer 147
the vehicle checked by an authorized service 6 Engine temperature 148
135
CONTROLS Displays
7 Outside temperature 148 Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
8 Central display range 149
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
Shift lights 149
wheel on the steering wheel.
9 Drive mode 125
10 Speed Limit Info 198 Settings
Speed Limit Assistant 212 Specific displays can be configured individu-
11 Time 152 ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
12 Fuel gauge 153 1. Apps menu
Range 153 2. "Vehicle apps"
Additional information: 3. "Displays"
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 138. 4. "Instrument cluster"

Operating elements on the steering
wheel Live Vehicle
Operating Function
element Principle
Display the menu bar on the Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
instrument cluster. own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
Press the corresponding arrow
key to move the selection. General information
Appropriate information is shown on the con-
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se- trol display depending on the driving situation.
lection up or down. Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection. Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
Configuring the layout ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the in-
strument cluster can be individually configured ▷ Vehicle status, refer to page 153.
and displayed. ▷ Current driving condition, refer to page 154.
▷ Sport displays, refer to page 154.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 278.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. ▷ Trip data, refer to page 150.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Static information
2. "LAYOUT" The following information may be shown per-
manently on the control display regardless of
the driving situation and driving mode set.
136
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Vehicle status. Configuring a view

▷ Trip data. The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display on the instrument
Adjusting the display cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-
tween an adaptive display and static content.
1. Apps menu wheel.
2. "Vehicle apps" A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
3. "Live Vehicle" cluster.
4. "Content" 2. "HEAD-UP"
5. Select the desired setting. Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
BMW Head-up display wheel on the steering wheel.
Principle Display
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance Turning the Head-up display on/off
the speed. 1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
General information 3. "Displays"
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of 4. "Head-up display"
the Head-up display can be stored using the
5. "Head-up display"
memory function.
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
Overview
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
Overview
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Sport displays.
▷ Shift lights.
▷ Lists and messages.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
Head-up display views are projected onto the briefly as needed.
windshield using protective glass. The protec-
tive glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
137
CONTROLS Displays
Visibility of the display Indicator/warning lights

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
Principle
▷ Seat position.
The indicator and warning lights on the instru-
▷ Objects on the protective glass of the ment cluster show the status of some vehicle
Head-up display. functions. The indicator and warning lights in-
▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the dicate faults in monitored systems.
Head-up display.
▷ Windshield dirty on inside or outside. General information
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. The indicator and warning lights can illuminate
▷ Wet road. in various combinations and colors.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
If the image is distorted, have the basic set- drive-ready state is turned on.
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
Red lights
shop.
Seat belt reminder

Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
Head-up display, such as for the height, bright- buckled.
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis- Additional information:
plays in the Head-up display can be set up Seat belt reminder, refer to page 106.
separately such as for Driver Assistance.
1. Apps menu Airbag system
2. "Vehicle apps" Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-
3. "Displays" cates that the entire airbag system and
4. "Head-up display" seat belt tensioners are operational
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning light illuminates continuously: There
Special windshield is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked im-
mediately by an authorized service center or
The windshield is part of the system. another qualified service center or repair shop.
The shape and coating of the special wind- Additional information:
shield enable the system to function.
Airbags, refer to page 165.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop. Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Parking brake, refer to page 127.
138
Displays CONTROLS
Brake system Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle

Brake linings are worn or there is a detected from the right
malfunction in the brake system. Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli-
The braking assistance may not be op- sion with vehicle crossing from the right
erational. A higher pedal force may be has been detected. Increased aware-
required for braking. ness is required.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
authorized service center or another qualified sounds: Collision with a crossing vehicle is im-
service center or repair shop. minent. Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Intersection warning with City light braking
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig- function, refer to page 175.
gered.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 185.
detected from the left
Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli-
Pedestrian Warning sion with vehicle crossing from the left
Warning light illuminates: Risk of col- has been detected. Increased aware-
lision with a pedestrian has been ness is required.
detected. Increased awareness is re- Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
quired. sounds: Collision with a crossing vehicle is im-
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal minent. Intervene immediately by braking or
sounds: Collision with a pedestrian is immi- make an evasive maneuver.
nent. Intervene immediately by braking or Additional information:
make an evasive maneuver.
Intersection warning with City light braking
Additional information: function, refer to page 175.
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga-
tion, refer to page 174.
Intersection warning: vehicle from
undetectable direction of travel
Forward Collision Warning
Warning light illuminates: Risk of col-
Warning light illuminates: Risk of colli- lision with vehicle from unrecogniza-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected. ble direction of travel. Increased aware-
Increased awareness is required. ness is required.
Warning light flashes and acoustic signal Warning light flashes and acoustic signal
sounds: Risk of imminent collision with a vehi- sounds: Collision is imminent. Intervene imme-
cle is detected. Intervene immediately by brak- diately by braking or make an evasive maneu-
ing or make an evasive maneuver. ver.
Additional information: Additional information:
Forward Collision Warning with light braking Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 173. function, refer to page 175.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Active Cruise Control with Distance The system may not be operational.
Control The Antilock Braking System system is
not available.
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces- The ability to steer may be restricted during full
sary. braking.
Additional information: Have checked immediately by an authorized

service center or another qualified service cen-
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re- ter or repair shop.
fer to page 205.
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 194.
Steering Assistant
Depending on national-market version:
Steering Assistant
The warning light flashes or illumi-
nates. A signal sounds: Warning light illuminates and acoustic
The system is switched off. signal may sound: A system interrup-
tion is imminent.
Warning light flashes: Lane boundary has
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215. been crossed.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant: Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
hands not on steering wheel
Warning light illuminates and acoustic Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
signal sounds:
hands not on steering wheel
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. Yellow: System interruption is immi- Hands are not grasping the steering
nent. wheel. The system is still active.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if Grab the steering wheel with your
applicable. hands.
It is possible that the system will not execute Additional information:

any supporting steering movements. Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Additional information: Forward Collision Mitigation is limited
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215. or has malfunctioned
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: Function re-
Yellow lights
striction detected, e.g., due to system
limits of the cameras or because the system
Antilock Braking System
has malfunctioned. You may continue driving.
If necessary, follow the instructions from Check
Control messages.
140
Displays CONTROLS
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to Flat tire monitor

page 170.
Warning light illuminates: Flat Tire
Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire
Front Collision Warning switched off pressure loss.
Depending on the equipment and na- Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
tional-market version: the system is sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
turned off. Additional information:
Additional information: Flat tire monitor, refer to page 308.
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
Tire pressure monitor
Dynamic Stability Control Warning light illuminates: Tire Pressure
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil- Monitor is indicating a flat tire or tire
ity Control is regulating the drive and pressure loss. Follow the information in
brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized. the Check Control message.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv- Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ing style to the road conditions. ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability be detected.
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing. ▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed. the same radio frequency: after leaving the
If the warning light illuminates continuously, area of the interference, the system auto-
have the vehicle checked immediately by an matically becomes active again.
authorized service center or another qualified ▷ In the case of tires with special appro-
service center or repair shop. val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
Additional information: to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 195.
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
The Dynamic Stability Control center or another qualified service center or
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction repair shop as needed.
Control activated ▷ Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated an authorized service center or another
or Dynamic Traction Control is acti- qualified service center or repair shop.
vated. Additional information:
Additional information: Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 300.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 195.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, refer to Steering system
page 196.
The steering system may be faulty.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified
141
CONTROLS Displays
Emissions Parking lights, low beams, refer to page 157.

▷ The warning light illuminates:
Worsening emissions, e.g., due to Automatic High Beam Assistant
an incorrectly fitted fuel cap. Have Low beams are switched on and the
the vehicle checked as soon as pos- Automatic High Beam Assistant is acti-
sible. vated.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir- High beams are switched on and off automati-
cumstances: cally depending on the traffic situation.
This indicates that there is excessive misfir- Additional information:
ing in the engine.
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve- page 160.
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control Lane departure warning
components, in particular the catalytic con- Depending on vehicle equipment and
verter. national-market version:
Additional information: The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to tem is switched on. At least one lane boundary
page 326. has been detected on one side of the vehicle.
The system is ready to intervene and issue
warnings.
Green lights
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-
ing a steering intervention.
Turn signal
Turn signal is on.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 177.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed. Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
Additional information: automatically
Turn signal, refer to page 130. Automatic Hold is ready to use. The
vehicle is automatically held in place
when it is stationary.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on. Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.
Parking lights, low beams, refer to Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
page 157.
against rolling away
The vehicle is automatically secured
Low beams against rolling away after stopping.
Low beams are switched on. Additional information:
Additional information: Automatic Hold, refer to page 128.
142
Displays CONTROLS
Manual Speed Limiter the speed limit has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on. Additional information:
The indicator light flashes: the set Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 212.
speed limit has been exceeded.
Additional information: Steering Assistant
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 200. The system is activated and helps to
keep the vehicle in the lane.
Cruise Control Additional information:
The system is active. Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Cruise control, refer to page 202. Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
lane change in progress
Active Cruise Control with Distance Arrow icon for lane change green: the
Control system carries out a lane change.
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi- Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
cle icon goes out if no vehicle in front is page 220.
detected.
Indicator lamp is flashing: vehicle ahead is Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
driving off. lane change not possible
Additional information: Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re- propriate side: system detected a lane
fer to page 205. change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Speed Limit Assistant activated Additional information:
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
Depending on vehicle equipment, the
page 220.
indicator light illuminates green, to-
gether with the icon for a cruise control
system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
detected speed limits can be applied manually functional requirements not met
for the displayed system.
Depending on the national-market ver-
Additional information: sion:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 212. Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane
change not possible; functional requirements
Speed Limit Assist: Apply speed limit not met.
The detected speed limit can be ap- Additional information:

plied with the SET button. As soon as Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
page 220.
143
CONTROLS Displays
Assisted Driving Mode Plus Cruise Control

The system is active. The system is interrupted.
Additional information: Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to Cruise control, refer to page 202.
page 218.
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Assisted Driving Mode Plus Control
Alternative display, depending on vehi- Indicator light is illuminated: the system
cle equipment. is interrupted.
The system is active. Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
Additional information: not adequate for the system to work. The sys-
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 218.
until you actively resume control by pressing
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Blue lights Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
High beams fer to page 205.
High beams have been switched on.
Additional information: Steering Assistant
▷ High beams, refer to page 130. The system is on standby and does not
▷ Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to manipulate steering movements.
page 160. System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Gray lights Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 215.
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an- Assisted Driving Mode Plus
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
The system is interrupted and will acti-
vate automatically as soon as all func-
Seat belts, refer to page 104. tional requirements are met.
Manual Speed Limiter Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 218.
The system is interrupted.
Additional information: White lights
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to
page 200. Cruise Control with Distance Control
No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
144
Displays CONTROLS
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re- sages are automatically displayed again after
fer to page 205. approx. 8 seconds.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden
The system can be activated.
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Additional information: Check Control messages are stored and can
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to be displayed again later.
page 218.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Check Control 1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Principle 3. "Vehicle status"
The Check Control system monitors functions 4. "Check Control"
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
5. Select the desired text message.
monitored systems.
Display
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a Check Control
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if At least one Check Control message is
applicable, in the Head-up display. displayed or stored.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
a text message may appear on the control dis- Text messages
play.
Text messages in combination with an icon
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-
Hiding Check Control messages trol message and the meaning of the indica-
An arrow icon next to the Check Control tor/warning lights.
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden. Supplementary text messages
To hide Check Control messages, press Additional information, such as the cause of a
the left arrow button on the steering fault or the required action, can be called up
wheel. via Check Control.
With urgent text messages, the added text will
be automatically displayed on the control dis-
Continuous display
play.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
continuously and are not cleared until the fault
ther help can be selected.
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,
the messages are displayed consecutively. 1. Apps menu
Permanently displayed Check Control mes- 2. "Vehicle apps"
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
145
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Vehicle status" Display

4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
An example:
Selection lists To change the track or entertainment source
after bringing up the entertainment list, use the
Principle arrow buttons on the steering wheel. Press the
thumbwheel to confirm the selection.
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or Turn the thumbwheel up or down to select the
the Head-up display. desired entry in the list. Press the thumbwheel
to confirm the selection.
▷ Entertainment source.
Depending on the equipment version, the list
▷ Current audio source.
in the instrument cluster may differ from the
▷ List of most recent telephone calls. illustration.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Gear shift indicator
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op- Principle
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel. The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
Control ele- Function ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ments ing style.
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the entertainment list or scroll General information
up or down in the list. The gear shift indicator is active in manual
Press knurled wheel: confirm mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
selection. national-market version.
Press the corresponding arrow Displays

key to change the entertain-
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-
ment source.
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument
Show list of most recent tele- cluster.
phone calls. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
146
Displays CONTROLS
Example Description Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in

percent, POWER.
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
Reduced drive power
With shift paddles: temporary The available power may be reduced due to
manual mode. certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
With shift paddles: Sport program. In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
Shift information. Icon Description
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.

White icon: increased drive sys-
Additional information: tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
Shift paddles, refer to page 123.
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
Power gauge Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
Principle sion:
Drive power limitation defined
The power gauge indicates the currently
via the BMW Digital Key.
drawn drive power as a percentage.
System-related functional limi-
Enabling/disabling the power gauge tation.
The power display or tachometer is shown de- A Check Control message is
pending on the driving mode selected or the displayed in addition where ap-
individual configuration of the layout. plicable.
Display
Tachometer
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
147
CONTROLS Displays
The tachometer display changes depending Drive at moderate RPM and

on the selected driving mode. vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
Reduced engine speed range is in the middle or in the left half of the
The available engine speed range may be re- temperature display.
duced due certain factors such as a cold drive ▷ Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
system. The tachometer display is automati- ature range. In addition, a Check Control
cally adjusted depending on the available en- message is displayed.
gine speed range.
Coolant level, refer to page 322.
Standby state and drive-
ready state Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru-
A red indicator light is displayed.
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
READY is displayed in the

Outside temperature
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for General information
automatic engine start. If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
Additional information: A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
page 40.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 118. Safety information
Engine temperature Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
Display there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
▷ Cold engine: the needle is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style
is in the blue temperature to the weather conditions at low tempera-
range, close to the stop of tures.
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
148
Displays CONTROLS
Shift lights Central display range

Principle Displayable content
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at The following settings can be selected:
which optimal acceleration can be achieved. ▷ Reduced display.
▷ Trip data, refer to page 150.
General information
▷ Assisted View, refer to page 151.
The shift lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster ▷ Navigation system route preview.
or on the Head-up display in combination with ▷ Navigation system map view.
the tachometer. ▷ G-Meter, refer to page 152.
▷ Entertainment.
▷ Android Auto©.
▷ "SPORT": The driving mode must be se-
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
lected depending on vehicle equipment.
tional-market version, select functions of
▷ To display the shift lights on the Head-up a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
display, select Sport view. played, e.g., map views.
▷ Manual mode M must be activated. Some contents for the central display range
▷ Advanced mode must be activated. can also be configured as a view in the Head-
Additional information: up display.
Advanced mode, refer to page 124. Additional information:

Head-up display, refer to page 137.
Display Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Configuring the central display

range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate 1. Press the button on the steering
an upcoming shift point. wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
▷ Shift when all fields illuminate red at the cluster.
latest.
2. "CONTENT"
▷ When the maximum RPM is reached, the
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-
gine. 3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
149
CONTROLS Displays
Trip data Display in the instrument cluster

Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
Principle
ter.
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or
permanently on the control display.
▷ Current consumption, arrow 1.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
pending on different intervals.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
Display on the control display
The icon is displayed when the vehicle
General information is in Coasting mode.
The following trip data is shown on the control ▷ Total mileage, arrow 4.
display:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. Current consumption
▷ Average fuel consumption depending The current fuel consumption display allows
on the configured interval. you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
▷ Travel time depending on the config- to drive economically and in an environmen-
ured interval. tally-friendly manner.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval. Average consumption
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode. The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip
Displaying trip data continuously data are configured.
1. Apps menu
Adjusting the display of the trip data
2. "Vehicle apps"
The intervals for the display of the trip data
3. "Live Vehicle" in the instrument cluster and on the control
4. "Content" display are adjustable.
5. "Trip data" Using the button on the left steering column
switch:
150
Displays CONTROLS
The trip data is displayed. The trip data is displayed.
2. Press button repeatedly until the desired 2. Press and hold the button until the values
setting is displayed. are reset.
Via iDrive: Via iDrive:
1. Apps menu 1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps" 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings" 3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data" 4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values" 5. "Reset Individual"
6. Select the desired setting: The average values and counters are reset.
▷ "Since start of trip ( )": the values are au- Once the average values and counters have
tomatically reset approx. four hours af- been reset, the following interval is automati-
ter the vehicle has come to a standstill. cally activated:
▷ "Since last refuel ( )": the values are au- "Since Individual ( )"
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
▷ "Since factory": the values since the
Assisted View
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played. Principle
▷ "Since Individual ( )": the values since With Assisted View, information on driver as-
the last manual reset are displayed. The sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
values can be reset at any time. strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
Resetting average values manually Safety information

The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: Warning
"Since Individual ( )" The system cannot serve as a substitute for
Using the button on the left steering column the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
switch: the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
151
CONTROLS Displays
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation

closely, be ready to take over steering and
G-Meter
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate. General information
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
General on the vehicle occupants while driving.
You can configure how Assisted View is dis- The display can be configured on the central
played on the central display range. display range of the instrument cluster.
Additional information: The values are automatically reset whenever
Central display area, refer to page 149 you start a new drive.
Display Central display area, refer to page 149
Manually reseting G-Meter values

1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
2. Press and hold the thumbwheel on

the steering wheel until the values are re-
set.
An example with active Driver Assistance: the
indicator and warning lights for the distance
control and the Automatic Lane Change Assis-
Date and time
tant indicate a lane change to the next lane.
Various settings can be applied for the date
At the same time, the lane change to the next
and time display such as the date format.
lane is shown with animation in the Assisted
View. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set and
System limits automatic time setting can be activated. With
automatic time setting, the time, date and, if
The system's detection capability is limited. necessary, the time zone are updated auto-
Only objects that are detected by the system matically.
are taken into account.
1. Apps menu
The system may indicate something wrong.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.
4. "Date and time"
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
152
Displays CONTROLS
Fuel gauge The Check Control message appears

continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis- Safety information
played.
NOTICE
General information
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
vary.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
Additional information: There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
Refueling, refer to page 282. promptly.
Display
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
icon shows which side of the ve- The current range is displayed
hicle the fuel filler flap is on. as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument

cluster Setting the units of
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
measurement
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
Range and temperature.
1. Apps menu
Principle 2. "Vehicle apps"
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current tank of fuel.
4. "Units"
General information 5. Select the desired setting.
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
Vehicle status
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining General information
range means that engine functions cannot al- The status can be displayed and actions per-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when formed for several systems, such as for Check
cornering at speed. Control.
153
CONTROLS Displays
Displaying vehicle status ▷ Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 278.

1. Apps menu ▷ Coasting, refer to page 279.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se-
lected.
Overview
▷ The following setting is selected for Live
Icon Description Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of Display

the flat tire monitor, refer to
page 308.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status

of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 300.
"Engine oil level": electronic

oil measurement, refer to
page 320.
"Check Control": displaying

An example:
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 145. The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
"Required services": displaying
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
service notifications, refer to
page 155.
Sport displays
Current driving condition
Principle
General information The Sport displays especially support a sporty
The current driving condition is displayed dy- driving style.
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display. Functional requirements
The following states can be displayed: ▷ SPORT driving mode is selected.
▷ Driving. ▷ The following setting is selected for Live
▷ Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING" Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
▷ "CHARGING BATTERY"
Display
With mild hybrid technology:
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
▷ Adaptive recuperation. Vehicle menu on the control display.
▷ Efficient rolling with engine switched off. The following information is displayed:
154
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Torque. 4. "Required services"

▷ Power. 5. "Vehicle inspection"
▷ Boost pressure. 6. "Date:"
▷ Engine oil temperature. 7. Select the desired setting.
Service notifications
Principle
The function displays the service notifications
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A service advisor can read out the current
service notifications from the vehicle key.
Display
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the control display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
Maintenance work and legally mandated
inspections are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
Entering appointment dates

Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
155
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. Right roadside parking light.
Lights and lighting Left roadside parking light.
Overview
Buttons on the vehicle key
Buttons in the vehicle
Icon Function
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
Pathway lighting.
Icon Function Automatic headlight control

Front fog lights
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off au-
Exterior lighting off. tomatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
Daytime driving lights.
there is precipitation.
Parking lights.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Automatic headlight control. cause the lights to be turned on.
Adaptive lighting functions. If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
156
Lights CONTROLS
Activate automatic headlight control Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
Press the button on the light switch. battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
The LED in the button illuminates.

Turning off parking lights
The indicator light in the instrument The following options are available to turn off
cluster is illuminated when the low the parking lights:
▷ Press the button on the light switch.

System limits
▷ Turn on drive-ready state.
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi- After the drive-ready state is switched on,
tions. the automatic headlight control will be acti-
vated.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Low beams
Turning on low beams

Parking lights, low-beams Press the button on the light switch.
and roadside parking lights
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
General information state is switched on.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive- The indicator light in the instrument
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting cluster illuminates.
is automatically switched off after a period of
time. Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
Parking lights
Turning off low beams
General information Depending on the national-market version, the
The parking lights can only be switched on in low beams can be turned off in the low speed
the low speed range. range:
Turning on parking lights

▷ Press the button on the light switch.
Press the button on the light switch.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
cluster illuminates.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
157
CONTROLS Lights
Button Function Turning on the welcome light

▷ Automatically on approach.
Right roadside parking light on.
▷ During unlocking.
Left roadside parking light off.

with the vehicle locked.
Depending on the settings, the interior
Switching off the roadside parking light: lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
Press the button on the light switch or
turn on drive-ready state. The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
LED light carpet

Welcome lights
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually. The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Activating/deactivating welcome Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
light
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps" Pathway lighting
4. If necessary, "Additional settings" Principle
5. Depending on the equipment, select the For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
following setting: turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
surrounding the vehicle.
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
Switching pathway lighting on
▷ After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
▷ Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
158
Lights CONTROLS
Setting the duration ▷ Adaptive Light Control.

1. Apps menu ▷ Cornering light.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
Press the button on the light switch.
5. "Pathway lighting"
The LED in the button illuminates.
Daytime driving lights The adaptive lighting functions are active

when the drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
The daytime driving lights illuminate when Adaptive Light Control
drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
Activating/deactivating daytime Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
driving lights other parameters, the light from the headlight
In some countries, daytime driving lights are follows the course of the road.
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti- To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap-
vate the daytime driving lights in front. tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo-
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting" Cornering light
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na- Principle
tional-market version: In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
▷ "Daytime driving lights" roads or when turning, an additional cornering
▷ "Rear daytime driving lights" light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
Adaptive lighting functions
General information
Principle The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il- where applicable, the use of turn signals.
lumination of the road.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
General information of the steering-wheel angle.
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
159
CONTROLS Lights
Adaptive headlight range Activating Automatic High Beam

control Assistant
The adaptive headlight range control feature

balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
Automatic High Beam

Assistant
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Principle The indicator light in the instrument
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects cluster is illuminated when the low
other road users early on and automatically beams are switched on.
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low beams and high beams.
General information The blue indicator light in the instru-
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
that the high beams are switched on, when- tem switches on the high beams.
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
speed range, the high beams are not switched
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
on by the system.
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
The system responds to light from oncoming continuing the journey.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is de-
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
activated when manually switching the high
ies.
beams on and off.
The high beams can be switched on and off
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
manually at any time.
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
▷ Automatic headlight control is activated.
▷ Low beams are switched on.
160
Lights CONTROLS
Deactivating Automatic High Beam A Check Control message is displayed. The

Assistant system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
Press the button on the turn signal lever. The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situations that re-
Sensitivity of the Automatic High quire this, therefore dim manually.
Beam Assistant The system is not fully functional in the follow-
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
General information necessary:
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
Assistant can be adjusted. such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
Safety information as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
Warning ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
If adjustments have been made or the sen- ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk ing traffic on highways.
of accident. If adjustments have been made ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
and the sensitivity has been modified, make ence of highly reflective signs.
sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
blinded. Switch off the high beams manually mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with
if required. stickers, etc.
Functional requirements Laser high beams

▷ Setting at standstill only.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. Principle
▷ Light is turned off. The headlight range of the high beams is in-
creased and provides better illumination of the
Increasing sensitivity road.
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
161
CONTROLS Lights
General information Fog lights

The laser high beams are integrated into the
headlights and emit from there.
Front fog lights
When the high beams are turned on, starting
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the Principle
laser high beams are automatically turned on
The front fog lights work alongside the low
in addition to the LED high beams.
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road-
Depending on the national-market version, ad- way.
ditional information can be taken from the la-
ser sign on the headlight. Functional requirement
▷ Low beams are switched on.
Safety information
Front fog light on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster illuminates if the front fog
lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control is activated,

The respective info label is located in or on the low beams will come on automatically
the headlight and is visible from the outside or when you switch on the front fog lights.
when the hood is open. When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
The brightness can only be adjusted when the
parking lights or low beams are turned on.
Laser radiation.
Do not look into the beam.
Laser class 2. Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
162
Lights CONTROLS
Interior lighting Ambient light

Depending on the equipment version, interior Depending on the equipment version, lighting
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically interior.
controlled.
Activating/deactivating ambient
Overview light
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Turning ambient light on/off

The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
Reading lights hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
Interior lights it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting the color

Turning interior lights on/off
1. Apps menu
Press the button.
2. "Vehicle apps"
To switch off permanently: press the button 4. If necessary, "Ambience"
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
5. "Color"
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
Turning reading lights on/off 1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
5. "Brightness"
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear. 6. Select the desired setting.
163
CONTROLS Lights
Dynamic light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects
are still displayed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Dynamic light"
Reduced for night drive

Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
164
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
front passenger by responding to frontal im- protects the side of the body in the chest and
pacts in which seat belts alone would not pro- lap area.
vide adequate protection. Depending on the national-market version:
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on
165
CONTROLS Safety
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
outer rear seats. as possible when the airbag is deployed.
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
Head airbag hands can be crossed over the steering
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag wheel. Select the settings so that the
protects the head. shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
Ejection Mitigation is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
The head airbag system is designed as an
wheel.
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
through side windows during rollovers or side ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
collision events. the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
Knee airbag away from the side airbag.
Depending on the national-market version: ▷ There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
person.
of a frontal impact.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
Protective effect senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
General information
navigation devices or mobile phones.
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
Warning other objects to the front seats that are not
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy- specifically suited for seats with integrated
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag versions.
airbag system cannot provide protection as ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
intended and may cause additional injuries jackets, over the backrests.
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
▷ Do not modify individual components or
or danger to life. Follow the information on
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
airbag system.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Even when you follow all instructions very
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the closely, injury from contact with the airbags
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
166
Safety CONTROLS
The ignition and inflation noise may lead Malfunction

to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
▷ Warning light does not come on
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
when drive-ready state is turned on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
▷ The warning light illuminates con-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
tinuously.
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
Warnings and information on the airbags are
ter or repair shop.
also found on the sun visors.
Operational readiness of the airbag Setting the front seat positions

system The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
senger airbags depends on the position of the
Safety information driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
Warning brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
Individual components can be hot after de- play.
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components. Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 99.
Warning
Automatic deactivation of
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the front passenger airbags
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as Principle
intended despite the accident severity. There
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
is occupied by measuring the human body's
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
resistance.
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas-
repair shop. senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Display in the instrument cluster Before transporting a child on the front pas-
When drive-ready state is turned on, senger seat, refer to the safety information and
the warning light in the instrument instructions for children on the front passenger
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi- seat, see Children.
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
167
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information passenger's side are not ac-

tivated.
▷ The indicator light does not illuminate
Warning
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-
To ensure the front passenger airbag func- son of sufficient size is detected on the
tion, the system must be able to detect seat. The airbags on the passenger's side
whether a person is sitting in the front pas- are activated.
senger seat. The entire seat surface must
be used for this purpose. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that the Fault of the automatic deactivation
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the system
footwell. When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
Functional requirements indicator light for the front passenger airbags
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied illuminates.
seat surface: In this case, change the seat position so that
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats the front passenger airbags are activated and
or other items to the front passenger seat the indicator light goes out.
unless they are specifically determined to If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
be safe for use on the front passenger seat. the person sit in the rear seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below. Detected child restraint systems
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the The system generally detects children seated
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys- in a child restraint system, particularly in child
tem is to be installed on it. restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
▷ No moisture in or on the seat. point in time when the vehicle was manufac-
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
Indicator light for the front make sure that the indicator light for the front
passenger airbags passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates
that the child restraint system has been de-
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger tected and the front passenger airbags are not
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating activated.
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
ther activated or deactivated. Collision warning systems
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether General information
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
▷ The indicator light illuminates different systems that can help prevent an im-
when a child is properly minent collision.
seated in a child restraint ▷ Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to
system or when the seat is page 170.
empty. The airbags on the
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 177.
168
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to The following functions are adjustable.
page 180.
1. Apps menu
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 183.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 184.
4. "Driver Assistance"
▷ Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 185. 5. "Safety and warnings"
Safety information
Resetting the settings
Warning The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
delivery.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of 1. Apps menu
the system, it cannot independently react 2. "Vehicle apps"
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation 4. "Driver Assistance"
closely, be ready to take over steering and 5. "Safety and warnings"
braking at any time, and actively intervene 6. "Reset to recommended settings"
where appropriate.
System limits
Warning Safety information
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is- Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
sued late or in a manner that is not consis- it may react too late or in a manner that is not
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of consistent with normal use. There may be a
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
actively intervene where appropriate. to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
Detection capability
Depending on national-market version, some
The system's detection capability is limited.
of the systems are automatically activated
whenever you start driving. The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
169
CONTROLS Safety
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors. closely, be ready to take over steering and
Thus, a system response might not come or braking at any time, and actively intervene
might come late. where appropriate.
System limits of the sensors

Additional information: Warning
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
Forward Collision Mitigation warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
Principle accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be actively intervene where appropriate.
avoided, the system helps reduce the severity
of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible Warning
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
Individual functions may not work correctly
pendently, if needed.
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
General information a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
Depending on the equipment version, the For- Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the
following functions:
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak- Sensors
ing function, refer to page 173. Depending on the equipment, the system is
▷ Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Miti- controlled by the following sensors:
gation, refer to page 174. ▷ Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Intersection warning with City light braking ▷ Front radar sensor.
function, refer to page 175. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 176.
Speed range
Safety information The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
Warning 3 mph/5 km/h.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of temporarily.
the system, it cannot independently react Some functions are deactivated earlier.
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of The system is enabled as soon as the speed
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- drops below these values again.
170
Safety CONTROLS
Turning the Forward Collision The system checks for visual impairments. De-
Mitigation on/off pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
Turning on the system automatically
and field of vision also affect the timing of the
Depending on the national-market version, the warnings.
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Turning on system manually The following indicator/warning lights are
shown on the instrument cluster and, depend-
The system is activated by setting the warning ing on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up dis-
time. play:
Icon Meaning
Setting the warning time, refer to page 171.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
Turning system off manually national-market version:
Depending on national-market version, the ad- Function restriction detected, e.g.,
justment can only be made when the vehicle is due to system limits of the cameras
at a standstill or in a very low speed range. or because the system has malfunc-
tioned. You may continue driving.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
If necessary, follow the instructions
successively on the control display.
from Check Control messages.
1. Apps menu System limits of the cameras, refer to
2. "Vehicle apps" page 35.
3. "Driving settings" Depending on vehicle equipment and
4. "Driver Assistance" national-market version:
5. "Safety and warnings" The system is turned off.
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation" Risk of collision, for instance with a
7. "Off" person.
Setting the warning time Risk of collision, for instance with a

1. Apps menu preceding vehicle.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
3. "Driving settings" crossing from the right.
5. "Safety and warnings" Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the left.
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. Select the desired setting. Risk of collision with a vehicle from an
The more sensitive the warning time is set to unrecognizable direction of travel.
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
171
CONTROLS Safety
The corresponding indicator lights and warn- force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
ing lights may display differently if the system steering.
detects multiple objects. City brake function: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Warning function With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif- curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
ferent warning levels, depending on the re- At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
spective hazardous situation. only a brief brake intervention will occur.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance System limits
with the situation.
▷ Red warning light illuminates: Safety information
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Warning
▷ Red warning light flashes:
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme- it may react too late or in a manner that is not
diately. consistent with normal use. There may be a
▷ A warning signal sounds: risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme- erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
diately. to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
▷ Automatic brake intervention: and limitations.
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of an imminent danger of collision,
the system can also intervene with an auto- Detection capability
matic brake intervention and automatically The system's detection capability is limited.
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
The system only takes into account objects
complete stop.
that are located in the detection range of the
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
hard, the maximum braking force of the vehicle tem.
is used.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Automatic brake intervention
Thus, a system response might not come or
In case of a risk of collision, the system can might come late.
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic
Stability Control activates automatically.
A brake intervention can be canceled by step-
The system may be limited in the following
ping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient
situations:
172
Safety CONTROLS
▷ In tight curves. Display in the instrument cluster

▷ With limitation of the driving stability control If there is a risk of collision with a detected
systems. vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
Icon Meaning
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
Approach control warning
with light braking function Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Principle
The Approach control warning with light brak-
ing function warns of a possible risk of collision Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
and may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
System limits
by reducing impact speed.
General information
General information Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
▷ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- ▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
tection range. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap- Upper speed limit
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
may vary with the current driving situation. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han- temporarily. As soon as the speed drops below
dling when responding. If an active driving this value again, the system is reactivated.
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
173
CONTROLS Safety
Daytime Pedestrian Warning function

Collision Mitigation The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Principle Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170.
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-

ies, the Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation
System limits
function warns the driver of a possible risk
of collision with pedestrians and cyclists. The General information
system may brake automatically. Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
In the event of an accident, the system helps sion Mitigation" chapter.
by reducing impact speed.
Detection range
General information
The detection range in front of the vehicle is

divided into two areas:
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk ▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and
of collision with pedestrians at speeds above left of the central area.
approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is is-
Safety information
sued about pedestrians who are located within
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For- the extended area only if they are moving in
ward Collision Mitigation”. the direction of the central area.
Display in the instrument cluster The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
pedestrian, a warning light is displayed. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
Icon Meaning
because of their contour or posture.
Risk of collision with a pedestrian. ▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height.
174
Safety CONTROLS
Upper speed limit The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-
Depending on vehicle equipment, the system rent driving situation.
responds to pedestrians when the vehicle
peed is below 50 mph/80 km/h. Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Intersection warning with
City light braking function Display in the instrument cluster
Principle vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
At speeds that are common in towns and Icon Meaning

cities, the intersection warning with City light
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
braking function can warn the driver of a possi-
from the right.
ble risk of collision with crossing traffic at inter-
sections and junctions. The system may brake
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
automatically.
from the left.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed. Risk of collision with vehicle for which
the driving direction cannot be deter-
General information mined.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
System limits
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- General information

tection range. Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can sion Mitigation" chapter.
be detected by the system as soon as these
vehicles enter into the detection range of the Detection range
sensors. The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf- ▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
fic is detected. e.g. by buildings.
The system warns of a possible risk of colli- ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side view.
sion with vehicles at speeds above approx. ▷ Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
6 mph/10 km/h. tions.
175
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of Functional requirements

you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
vehicle.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles Display in the instrument cluster
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
vehicle or pedestrian, a warning light is dis-
played.
Evasion Assistant Icon Meaning
Warning when a vehicle is detected.

Principle
The Evasion Assistant can support the driver
in making evasive maneuvers in certain situa- Warning when a pedestrian is de-
tions, such as when obstacles or persons sud- tected.
denly appear.
General information Warning function with evasion

support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system is designed to provide assistance
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk
of collision.
The system issues a warning and intervenes System limits

to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
neuver is possible. General information
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
around the vehicle. sion Mitigation" chapter.
If the system identifies space alongside the ve-
hicle, it supports an evasive maneuver made Detection range
by the driver by safely performing automatic The following situations may not be detected,
steering movements. for instance:
▷ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
Safety information proached at high speed.
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For- ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
ward Collision Mitigation”. you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
176
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Safety information

▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such Warning
because of their contour or posture.
The system cannot serve as a substitute
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height. for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-
ing road and traffic situations. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
Lane Departure Warning conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate. Do
Principle not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
Warning
General information Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- Functional requirement

tection range.
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
The system issues a warning starting at a min- for the lane departure warning to be active.
imum speed. The minimum speed is country- The areas of the sensors must be clean and
specific and displayed on the control display. clear.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates. Sensors
The system does not provide a warning if the The system is controlled by a camera behind
turn signal is set in the respective direction be- the windshield.
fore exiting the lane.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
Turning on the system automatically

system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
177
CONTROLS Safety
Turning on system manually Setting the intensity of the steering

The system is activated by setting the warning wheel vibration
time. 1. Apps menu
Additional information: 2. "Vehicle apps"
Setting the warning time, refer to page 178. 3. "Driving settings"
Turning system off manually
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
market version, you must successively confirm
the switch-off on the control display. 7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
1. Apps menu
systems.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" Depending on the national-market
4. "Driver Assistance" version: turning steering intervention
5. "Safety and warnings" on/off
6. "Lane Departure Warning" 1. Apps menu
7. "Off" 2. "Vehicle apps"

Setting Lane Departure Warning 4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
Setting the warning time
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
1. Apps menu
7. "Steering intervention"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" steering intervention is automatically active af-
4. "Driver Assistance" ter every driving off.
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting. Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
▷ "Early" equipment and national-market version.
▷ "Medium"
Icon Meaning
▷ "Reduced"
Some warnings are suppressed de- Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-
pending on the situation, for instance tem is switched on. At least one lane
when purposely driving over lane mark- boundary has been detected on one
ings in curves or with dynamic passing side of the vehicle. The system is
without a turn signal. ready to intervene and issue warn-
ings.
Indicator light flashes green: System

is performing a steering intervention.
178
Safety CONTROLS
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- ▷ Immediately following a steering interven-

market version, information for the system is tion by the vehicle systems.
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru- ▷ When actively merging back to your own
ment cluster. lane after passing.
Assisted View, refer to page 151. Warning signal
Depending on the national-market version: in
Warning function the event of multiple active steering interven-
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
If you leave the lane out the driver's intervention at the steering
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
setting.
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
responding direction before changing the lane,
played.
a warning is not issued.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
Steering intervention sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
Depending on the equipment and the national-

End of warning
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the For instance, the warning or an active steering
system intervenes with a brief active steering intervention will be canceled in the following
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys- situations:
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
within the lane. The steering intervention can ▷ When returning to your own lane.
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time. ▷ With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
When steering intervention is active,
the indicator light flashes green. ▷ When flashing.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
For instance, the steering intervention will be driving stability.
suppressed in the following situations: ▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ With hard accelerating or braking. ▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
▷ When flashing. tion by the vehicle systems.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on. ▷ With manual steering intervention.
▷ In driving situation with high driving dynam- ▷ When another driver assistance system is
ics. activated, if applicable.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates ▷ No lane boundaries detected.
driving stability. ▷ When the system limits are reached.
179
CONTROLS Safety
System limits General information
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun- Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
daries such as in construction areas. next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in minimum speed.
snow, ice, dirt or water. The minimum speed is country-specific and
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads. displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects. The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
front of you. warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is dimly.
switched on via the Start/Stop button. Before you change lanes after setting the turn
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled. signal, the system issues a warning in the
A Check Control message may be displayed situations described above. The warning light
when the system is limited. A yellow warning in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
light also illuminates, depending on national- wheel vibrates.
market version. When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Safety information
Principle
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles Collision Mitigation" chapter.
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
Sensors
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
The system is controlled by the following sen-
warnings at different levels.
sors:
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Functional requirement Depending on the national-market

The areas of the sensors must be clean and version: turning steering intervention
clear. on/off
1. Apps menu
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection 2. "Vehicle apps"
on/off 3. "Driving settings"
1. Apps menu 4. "Driver Assistance"
2. "Vehicle apps" 5. "Safety and warnings"
3. "Driving settings" 6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
4. "Driver Assistance" 7. "Steering intervention"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection" Display in the instrument cluster
7. Select the desired setting. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Detection
Setting the warning time Assisted View, refer to page 151.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
3. "Driving settings" of a possible collision.
5. "Feedback via steering wheel" Prewarning
6. "Vibration intensity" The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
7. Select the desired setting. indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
The setting is applied to all collision warning or approaching from the rear.
systems.
181
CONTROLS Safety
Acute warning Upper speed limit

When an acute warning occurs, the steering If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
exterior mirror flashes brightly. temporarily.
An acute warning is issued if the following con- If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
ditions are met: 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
▷ Another vehicle is located in the critical
area. Displaying warnings
▷ Your own vehicle is approaching the other Depending on the selected warning settings,
lane. e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
▷ Depending on the system setting when the
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
turn signal is turned on.
uations.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been Functional limitations
turned off.
situations:
Steering intervention
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
Depending on the national-market version:
much faster than your own.
when there is no response to the vibration
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to ▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking ▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
is crossed, the system engages the active for instance by stickers.
steering intervention. The steering intervention Depending on the national-market version, the
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-
steering intervention can be noticed on the tions:
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
The steering intervention is carried out from daries such as in construction areas.
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
Warning light flashing ▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing objects.
purposes. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
System limits ▷ If the camera is impaired.
General information switched on via the Start/Stop button.
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn- A Check Control message may be displayed
ing systems" chapter. when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
182
Safety CONTROLS
Side collision mitigation Sensors

sors:
Principle
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
General information
Turning the side collision warning
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Side collision warning"
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the 7. Select the desired setting.
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
Setting the intensity of the steering
The minimum speed is country-specific and wheel vibration
displayed on the control display. 1. Apps menu
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next 2. "Vehicle apps"
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision. For this purpose, the system issues a 4. "Driver Assistance"
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir- 5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating 6. "Vibration intensity"
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering
intervention is performed by the system.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
Safety information systems.
Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Functional requirement market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
The camera behind the windshield determines
ment cluster.
the lane boundary positions.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter- Assisted View, refer to page 151.
vention to be active.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Warning function ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.
Warning light in exterior mirror ▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
front of you.
of a possible collision.
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
Acute warning
A Check Control message may be displayed
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light when the system is limited.
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
A Check Control message is displayed at the Rear-end collision
same time. preparation
Steering intervention
Principle
Depending on the national-market version,
if necessary, the system engages the active Depending on the equipment and national-
steering intervention to prevent a collision and market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
steering intervention can be noticed on the hind.
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time. General information
System limits
General information
situations: Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
184
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning When the system is triggered, the vehicle is
flashers will be switched on. brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions lane guidance.
are triggered. Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the system includes a
lane change function.
Safety information
With lane change function: on motorways or
Follow the safety information in the "Forward motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-
Collision Mitigation" chapter. hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where
possible. On other roads or with high traffic
Sensors volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in
The system is controlled by the radar sensors the current lane.
on the sides and rear.
Overview
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off Button in the vehicle
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
System limits
General information
Parking brake
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or Functional requirements
similar to your own speed.
▷ The Emergency Stop Assistant can be trig-
gered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h
Emergency Stop Assistant up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
▷ With lane change function: lane changes
are executed when the traffic situation al-
Principle lows.
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to Triggering the Emergency Stop
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.
Assistant
General information Briefly pull the parking brake switch to
trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered
automatically. The system can only be trig-
gered manually by the occupants.
185
CONTROLS Safety
▷ With lane change function: releasing the Icon Status

switch may trigger an automatic lane
change. When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle
lane.
for a maximum of 2 minutes.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on. Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
▷ An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
Lane boundary driven over.
Canceling Emergency Stop When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
Assistant
lane.
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle The hands are not grasping the
throughout the entire process. steering wheel. The system is still ac-
tive.
For instance, the system will be canceled in the
following situations: Warning light illuminates red and
▷ When steering. acoustic signal sounds: Hands not
▷ When flashing. grasping steering wheel. Interruption
of lane guidance is imminent.
▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys- Warning light illuminates red and
tem. acoustic signal sounds: Lane Guid-
ance is switched off.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position
at a standstill.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver
▷ The parking brake switch is pressed.
failure.
At standstill The system cannot replace the roadworthy

driving performance of a driver.
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away. Cross traffic warning
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
▷ The central locking system is unlocked. Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
Displays in the instrument cluster perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
Icon Status by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Without lane change function:
186
Safety CONTROLS
General information Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic

Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch
on automatically.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by 5. "Parking and maneuvering"
sensors.
6. "CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
Turning on the cross traffic warning
The system indicates approaching road users.
automatically
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- The system must be activated on the control
tance systems" chapter. display. As soon as Park Distance Control or a
camera view is active and a selector lever po-
Safety information sition is engaged, the system is automatically
switched on.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
Warning
switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react Depending on the national-market version, the
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of system is automatically active when the vehi-
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- cle is started.
closely, be ready to take over steering and Turning off the cross traffic warning
braking at any time, and actively intervene automatically
where appropriate.
The system is automatically turned off in the
Sensors ▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
The system is controlled by the following sen- ▷ When a certain distance covered is ex-
sors: ceeded.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
187
CONTROLS Safety
Warning function Depending on vehicle equipment: display in

camera image
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Visual warning Depending on the direction of travel, the view

to the front or back is displayed in the camera
Warning light in exterior mirror image.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
spective direction.
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing. Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
System limits

The function can be limited, for instance in the
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are ▷ In tight curves.
detected by the sensors. ▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
188
Safety CONTROLS
BMW Drive Recorder Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed

about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
Principle the vehicle.
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to Functional requirements
document surrounding traffic. ▷ Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General information ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Video recordings can be saved in different ▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
ways:
▷ Recording type was selected.
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.
▷ Recording time was selected.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident with the correspondingly set
recording type.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
The function makes it possible to document
before the first use of the recording function.
traffic situations with the correspondingly
set recording type. 1. Apps menu
The assistance systems' cameras are used to 2. "All apps"
record, e.g., Panorama View. 3. "Drive Recorder"
Additionally, the following parameters are 4. Accept Privacy Policy.
stored for the trip:
5. "Settings"
▷ Date.
6. "Allow recording"
▷ Time.
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Global Positioning System coordinates. Recording functions
Data protection Automatic recording
The permissibility of recording and using video Recordings are saved automatically when the
recordings is contingent upon the statutory vehicle sensors detect an accident.
regulations of the country in which the system The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
is to be used. The user is responsible for the onds before and after storage is triggered.
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations. If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
189
CONTROLS Safety
Manual recording 4. "Recordings"

5. Select desired recording.
Using the button
If a camera change occurred during the record-
ing, different segments of the video can be se-
lected.
Settings
Recording type
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
Press and hold this button.
4. "Settings"
Via iDrive
Recording time
Start the recording:
1. Apps menu
1. Apps menu 2. "All apps"
2. "All apps" 3. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Drive Recorder" 4. "Settings"
4. "Recording" 5. Select the desired setting.
5. "Start recording"
Recording can also be started by selecting the Cameras
widget on the control display. Different cameras can be selected.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec- 1. Apps menu
onds before and after storage is triggered.
2. "All apps"
Recording playback and 3. "Drive Recorder"

administration 4. "Settings"
Stored video recordings can be played back, 5. "Cam. selection"
exported and deleted. 6. Select desired camera.
For your own safety, the video recording is "All": In the event of an accident, the system
only displayed on the control display up to ap- switches automatically.
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their
versions, the video recording is only displayed
camera views are automatically selected.
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
System limits
1. Apps menu In the event of serious accidents, it may not
2. "All apps" be possible to store recordings if the damage
3. "Drive Recorder"
190
Safety CONTROLS
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
was interrupted. ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
If you overwrite a USB drive multiple times, it actively intervene where appropriate.
may not be possible to export recordings cor-
rectly.
Function
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver
Active Protection and front passenger seat belts are automati-
cally tightened once after driving off, if the seat
belt is fastened.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and require-
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
ments, the following individual functions are
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
active in accident-critical driving situations:
or collision situations.
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front seat
General information belts.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- ▷ Automatic closing of the windows.

market version, Active Protection consists of The windows remain open with a small
various PreCrash functions. gap.
The system is used to detect certain critical ▷ The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof
driving situations that might lead to an acci- closes automatically.
dent. This includes the following critical driving The sun protection is also closed.
situations:
▷ Automatic positioning of the backrest for
▷ Emergency braking. the front passenger seat.
▷ Severe understeering. After a critical driving situation without an acci-
▷ Severe oversteering. dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If
Certain functions of several systems can, the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec- stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-
tion triggering: ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
seat belt before continuing to drive. All other
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak- systems can be restored to the desired setting.
ing function: automatic brake intervention.
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
ing function: brake booster. PostCrash – iBrake
▷ Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions. Principle
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash –
Safety information iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
Warning
General information
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the The PostCrash – iBrake can reduce the risk of
system limits, critical situations might not be a further collision and its consequences.
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
191
CONTROLS Safety
At standstill and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-

tions.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Function
Harder vehicle deceleration
The system is switched on each time drive-
In certain situations, it may be necessary to ready state is switched on.
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
After starting the trip, the system is trained to
automatic braking allows.
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the gue can be detected.
brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
will be higher than the brake pressure that is
ing criteria into account:
achieved by the automatic braking function.
Automatic braking is interrupted. ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
Abort automatic braking ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic of trip.
braking in certain situations, for instance when ▷ Depending on the equipment: attention
making an evasive maneuver. of the driver through the Driver Attention
Abort automatic braking: Camera.
▷ By pressing the brake pedal. The system is active starting at ap-

prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
break recommendation.
Fatigue alert Break recommendation
Setting break recommendation

Principle
The break recommendation can be switched
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert- on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The 1. Apps menu
system recommends a break. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Safety information 4. "Driver Assistance"
Warning 6. "Fatigue Alert"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 7. Select the desired setting.
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
Display
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
192
Safety CONTROLS
During the display, various settings can be se- Overview

lected.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
System limits
System functionality may be limited. If the
function is limited, either no warning is issued
or an incorrect warning is issued. The system Depending on the equipment, the instrument
function may be limited in the following situa- cluster has up to three infrared light sources.
tions, e.g.: Depending on the light conditions, these light
▷ If the time is set incorrectly. sources can be visible when the vehicle is in
▷ At a predominantly driven speed below ap- standby mode.
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during System limits
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
▷ In active driving situations, such as when functional in the following situations:
changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
▷ When the road condition is poor. ered by the steering wheel.
▷ In the event of strong side winds. ▷ With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Driver Attention Camera

Principle
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver’s activity and, depending on the
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.
General information
For support by assistance systems, the atten-
tion of the driver is analyzed by evaluating the
head position and eye opening of the driver.
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
193
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Brake assistant
This chapter describes model-specific equip- The brake assistant automatically applies
ment, systems, and functions that are currently maximum braking assistance when the brake
available, or may become available in the fu- pedal is depressed quickly. It reduces the brak-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. ing distance to a minimum during emergency
Additional information: braking. The advantages of the Antilock Brak-
ing System are thereby utilized.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
during full braking.
Antilock Braking System
Drive-off assistant
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
Principle
of the wheels during braking.
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
The vehicle maintains its steerability even dur-
uphill grades.
ing emergency braking, which increases the
active driving safety.
Driving off
General information 1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each time drive-ready state is turned on. 2. Release the brake pedal and drive off
quickly.
Malfunction After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates. Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
In order to prevent rolling back when driving
off, use the parking brake.
▷ The Antilock Braking System system is not

available. 1. Pull and release switch before driv-
▷ The ability to steer is restricted during full ing off.
braking. The parking brake is set.
Have checked immediately by an authorized 2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to
service center or another qualified service cen- drive off.
ter or repair shop.
194
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Dynamic Stability Control Overview
Button in the vehicle

Principle
Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive
power and by brake interventions on individual
wheels.
General information
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Dynamic Stability Control
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information Activating/deactivating Dynamic

Stability Control
Warning
General information
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched
on.
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of When Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- driving stability is reduced while accelerating
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation and when cornering.
closely, be ready to take over steering and To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
braking at any time, and actively intervene Stability Control as soon as possible.
where appropriate.
Activating/deactivating the system
Warning
1. Press the button to open the selec-
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars, tion.
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
2. "DSC OFF"
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-
ical driving situations. There may be a risk of Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic 3. Press the button again to reactivate
Stability Control. Dynamic Stability Control.
195
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Displays in the instrument cluster General information

View when Dynamic Stability When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
Control is deactivated. vated, there is maximum traction. Driving sta-
bility is limited during acceleration and when
cornering.
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-
trol may be useful in the following situations:
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil- ▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ity Control is regulating the drive and ground.
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized. ▷ When driving with snow chains.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Overview
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control has failed or is initializing. Button in the vehicle
Driving stabilization is restricted or has
failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
Automatic program change

Dynamic Stability Control can be activated
Dynamic Stability Control
automatically by Front Collision Mitigation de-
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward
Collision Mitigation as necessary.
Additional information: Activating/deactivating the Dynamic
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 170. Traction Control
Dynamic Traction Control 1. Press the button to open the selec-

tion.
2. "Traction": Dynamic Traction Control is ac-
Principle
tivated.
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of
the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive
power is optimized. 3. Press the button again to reactivate
The system ensures maximum drive power Dynamic Stability Control.
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.
196
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument cluster M sport differential

View when Dynamic Traction
Control is activated. The M Sport differential provides for continu-
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-
tial, depending on the driving situation. This
prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and
thereby provides optimal traction in any driving
The indicator light illuminates: the Dy- situation.
namic Traction Control is activated.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving style to the situation.
Automatic program change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
is activated automatically:
Variable sport steering
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control The variable sports steering facilitates direct
is activated. and agile handling with little steering effort.
▷ In case of a brake intervention by Front Col- The variable sports steering works independ-
lision Mitigation. Deactivate Forward Colli- ently of the current speed, varying the steering
sion Mitigation as necessary. gear ratio in line with the steering angle.
▷ If the suspension control system fails.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW
xDrive and other suspension control systems,
such as Dynamic Stability Control, further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
197
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options 6. "Speed warning"
7. "Warning above:"
This chapter describes model-specific equip- 8. Select the desired setting.
available, or may become available in the fu- Applying current speed as the
speed warning
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Speed warning 4. "Driver Assistance"
Principle 6. "Speed warning"
The speed warning can be used to set a speed 7. "Adopt current speed"
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
Speed Limit Info
General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed Speed Limit Info
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by
3 mph/5 km/h. Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
Activating/deactivating the speed speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
warning necessary, the Head-up display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
4. "Driver Assistance" well as overhead sign posts.
5. "Safety and warnings" Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
6. "Speed warning" and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
Adjusting the speed or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
1. Apps menu
The system may also show speed limits that
2. "Vehicle apps"
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
3. "Driving settings" navigation system has current map data.
198
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur- 4. "Driver Assistance"

rent map data for the country in which the ve- 5. "Driving"
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
For information on the current map version
7. "Speed limits"
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter. 8. "Show current limit"
Display
▷ Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Speed Limit Info
Safety information Icon Description
Current speed limit.

Warning
Depending on the national-
The system cannot serve as a substitute for market version, it is possible
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing to switch between the units of
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of measurement.
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of No data on current speed limit
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- available.
closely, be ready to take over steering and Speed Limit Info not available.
where appropriate.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,

Sensors the display will flash. Depending on national-
The system is controlled by a camera behind market version, an acoustic signal also sounds.
the windshield. The warning for exceeding the maximum per-
missible speed can be activated or deactivated
Displaying Speed Limit Info via iDrive:
1. Apps menu
General information
2. "Vehicle apps"
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending 3. "Driving settings"
on the national-market version, Speed Limit 4. "Driver Assistance"
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument 5. "Driving"
cluster.
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 7. "Warning when speeding"
1. Apps menu
Settings
2. "Vehicle apps"
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
199
3. "Driving settings" Manual Speed Limiter

5. "Driving" Principle
6. "Speed Limit Assistance" The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set
7. Select the desired setting. a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding speed limits.
System limits
General information
System limits of the sensors The system can limit the speed, starting at
Additional information: 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven
▷ Camera, refer to page 35. at any speed below the set speed limit.
Functional limitations Overview

The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
Buttons on the steering wheel
situations:
Button Function
▷ Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint. System on/off.
▷ Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
Store current speed.
▷ In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data. Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
▷ If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable. Rocker switch:
▷ When roads deviate from the navigation, Changing the speed limit.
such as due to changes in road layout.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
Operation
front of you.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic Turning on the speed limiter
signs applied to them.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected. The current speed is adopted as the speed
▷ In the presence of country-specific road limit.
signs or road layouts. If the system is turned on while the vehi-
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
corresponding speed.
200
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic When the speed limit is set during a trip to
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle a value below the current speed, the vehicle
may change to COMFORT drive mode. coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by
Turning off the speed limiter pressing a button:
Press the button on the steering wheel. Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the

following situations, for example: Exceeding the speed limit
▷ When the engine is switched off. When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
▷ When Cruise Control is switched on. limit, a warning is issued.
▷ When certain driving modes are activated The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
via Driving Experience Control. Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
The displays turn off. to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
Stopping the speed limiter speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the vated.
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Warning when the speed limit is
Changing the speed limit exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is
greater than the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
ally, a signal sounds.
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷ When the speed limit is reduced to be-
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
low the current vehicle speed, the signal
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-
sounds after some time.
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex-
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator
past the resistance point, the desired speed
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded, such as when driving downhill,
the vehicle is not actively braked.
201
Displays in the instrument cluster conditions. For instance, acceleration can

change depending on the driving mode.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
Safety information
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem. Warning
▷ Green marking: system is ac- The system cannot serve as a substitute for
tive. the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
▷ Gray marking: system is in- the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
terrupted. the system, it cannot independently react
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Indicator light braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Icon Description
The indicator light illuminates: the

system is switched on. Warning
The indicator light flashes: the set The use of the system can lead to an in-
speed limit has been exceeded. creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
Gray indicator light: the system has
▷ On winding roads.
been interrupted.
▷ With high traffic volume.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
Cruise Control without There may be a risk of accidents or risk of
Distance Control damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. Warning
The system maintains the set speed. The sys- The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
needed. accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
General information and actively intervene where appropriate.
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
202
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster

Warning illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
when towing with Front Collision Warning en- Cruise control is active. The current speed is
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is maintained and stored as desired speed.
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
Warning and Cruise Control before towing. be turned on.
Turning off the system

Overview
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Button Function
Cruise control on/off.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Interrupting Cruise Control
Continue cruise control with the last Stopping the system manually
setting. When active, press the button.
Interrupt cruise control.
Stopping the system automatically

Store current speed. The system is automatically interrupted in the
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug- following situations, for example:
gested speed manually. ▷ When braking manually.
Rocker switch: ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
Set speed. ▷ While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled

or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Turning Cruise Control on/off driving stability.
Turning on the system

press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
203
Adjusting the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
Maintaining and storing the speed decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the accel-
erator pedal.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-
the system is interrupted. cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
When the system is switched on, the current switch beyond the resistance point causes
speed is maintained and stored as the set the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
Continuing cruise control
ometer. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on. Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large be-
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise,
button.
unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Press the button. may occur.
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted.
Changing the speed
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly Display in the speedometer

until the desired speed is set. Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
If active, the displayed speed is stored and speedometer displays the status of the sys-
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the tem.
road is clear.
204
▷ Green marking: system is ac-

tive, the marking indicates
Active Cruise Control with
the desired speed. Distance Control
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi- Principle
cates the stored speed. Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and
▷ No marking: system is switched off. a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
Indicator light
General information
Icon Description The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
No indicator light: system is switched matically.
off.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
Indicator light green: system is active. adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
Gray indicator light: the system has uation allows.
been interrupted. The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
Displays in the Head-up display
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
Some system information can also be dis- still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
played in the Head-up display. riod, the system is able to detect this within the
The icon is displayed when the set given system limits.
speed is reached. Otherwise, drive off on your own, such as by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker
switch on the steering wheel.
System limits
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The control settings may change under certain
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades conditions. For instance, acceleration can
if the drive power is insufficient. change depending on the driving mode.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed Safety information
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Warning
205

braking at any time, and actively intervene Warning
where appropriate.
Warning a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away. Overview
▷ Set the parking brake. Button Function
turn the front wheels in the direction of With Steering Assistant:
the curb. Cruise control on/off.
With Steering Assistant:
a wheel chock. Select function.
Without Steering Assistant:
Warning Cruise control on/off.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted Store current speed.

or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
gested speed manually.
and actively intervene where appropriate. With Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control.
Continue cruise control with the last
Warning setting.
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
Without Steering Assistant:
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations: Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
▷ When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed. Without Steering Assistant:
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own Interrupt cruise control.
lane.
Increase the distance.
▷ When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed. Switch Distance Control on/off.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
206
Button Function Setting the function

When the system is active, press the
Reduce distance.
button repeatedly until the desired
Switch Distance Control on/off. function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
Rocker switch:
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Set speed.
Icon Function
Sensors Cruise Control with Distance Control.
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. The selected function is shown in green.
Application range Turning on the system

With Steering Assistant:
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is 1. Press the button on the steering
20 mph/30 km/h. wheel.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment. 2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
The system can also be activated when sta- Without Steering Assistant:
tionary. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Turning Cruise Control on/off or

stopping it The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
With Steering Assistant: Assisted
Driving Mode Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
General information If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
This button is used to switch the con-
figured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri- To switch off the system while stationary, step
marily used function. on brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
207
With Steering Assistant. Adjusting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed

Without Steering Assistant.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is

deleted.
Stopping the system manually

When active, press the button on the steering
wheel:
With Steering Assistant. Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be
activated.
Without Steering Assistant.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
If interrupting the system while stationary, The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
press on the brake pedal at the same time. ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
Stopping the system automatically
be turned on.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
▷ When braking manually.
Press the button.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Changing the speed
driving stability.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, the seat
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is
opened.
▷ The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
heavy precipitation. until the desired speed is set.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the If active, the displayed speed is stored and
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
system. road is clear.
208
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the tem takes into account the traffic situation and
resistance point, the set speed increases or ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. 3. "Driving settings"
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the 4. "Driver Assistance"
action. 5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Adjusting the distance 7. "Situational distance control"
Safety information
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
Warning by calling up the stored speed.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for Make sure that the difference between current
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the speed and stored speed is not too large be-
system limits, deceleration can be late. There fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise,
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam- unwanted vehicle deceleration or acceleration
age to property. Be aware to the surround- may occur.
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
Press the button on the steering wheel with
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
the system interrupted:
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking. With Steering Assistant.
Reducing the distance Without Steering Assistant.

Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
Instrument cluster will display selected dis- ues.
tance. In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
Increasing the distance ▷ When the system is switched off.
Press the button repeatedly until the ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-

tance.
Automatic adaptation of the distance

market version: the system can be set so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-
209
Changing between Cruise Control Display in the speedometer

with/without Distance Control Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
Safety information tem.
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
Warning tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the ▷ Gray marking: system is in-
stored speed. There may be a risk of acci- terrupted, the marking indi-
dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust cates the stored speed.
the set speed to the traffic conditions and ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
brake as needed.
Indicator lights and warning lights

Changing over the Cruise Control mode Depending on the equipment:
Switching Cruise Control without Distance Icon Description
Control off and on:
White indicator light:
No distance control display, as the
▷ Press and hold this button. accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Indicator light illuminates green:

▷ Press and hold this button.
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
With Steering Assistant: switch on Distance you.
Control:
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
Press the button. in front is detected.
Indicator light flashes green:
Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance Vehicle in front drove off.

Control: Indicator light illuminates gray:
System interrupted.
▷ Press the button.
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
▷ Press the button. system to work.
After changing, a Check Control message is The system was deactivated but ap-
displayed. plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
Displays in the instrument cluster brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Warning light flashes red and acous-

General information
tic signal sounds:
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
ver, if necessary.
210
Assisted View Detection range

displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed The detection capability of the system and the

automatic braking performance are limited.
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display. For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
Distance information ing situations:
The icon is displayed when the dis- ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead road users.
is too short.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment and
The distance information is active in the fol- national availability, for red traffic lights.
lowing situations: ▷ For cross traffic.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control ▷ For oncoming traffic.
switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected. Merging vehicles
Head-up display, refer to page 137.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. merges into your lane, the system may not be
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi-
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
211
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle Driving off

driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
system requests that the driver intervene by automatically; for example:
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed. ▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
Cornering In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle detection.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
When the set speed is too high for a curve, vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves or evading.
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed. Drive power
The system has a limited detection range. Sit- The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi- speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be if the drive power is insufficient.
detected very late. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Speed Limit Assistant

Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
When you approach a curve the system may speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due plied.
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly General information
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
pedal the system is reactivated and controls Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
speed independently. this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
212
▷ Manual Speed Limiter. Turning Speed Limit Assistant

▷ Cruise control. on/off
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control. 1. Apps menu
The speed value is suggested as the new de- 2. "Vehicle apps"
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed 3. "Driving settings"
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated. 4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Safety information 6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Speed limits"
Warning 8. Select the desired setting:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing can be applied manually.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of ▷ "Show anticipation": Depending on the
the system, it cannot independently react national-market version: current and up-
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of coming speed limits are displayed in
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- the instrument cluster without being ap-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation plied.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
where appropriate.
in the instrument cluster.
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Warning Limit Assistant will be turned off.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of Displays in the instrument cluster
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a driver assistance
and actively intervene where appropriate.
system are activated.
Overview
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
213
Icon Function Setting the speed adjustment

1. Apps menu
the indicator light illuminates green, 2. "Vehicle apps"
together with the icon for a speed 3. "Driving settings"
control system: 4. "Driver Assistance"
Speed Limit Assistant is active and 5. "Driving"
detected speed limits can be applied
manually for the displayed system. 6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting:
Detected change of a speed limit with
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
immediate effect.
the speed adaptation that affects all
Depending on the national-market speeds.
version, it is possible to switch be-
▷ "2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-
tween the units of measurement.
vate additional speed adaptation.
Indicator light illuminates green: the ▷ "Adjust speed limits": With additional
detected speed limit can be applied speed adjustment activated, set the
with the SET button. tolerance for speed limits up to
After it has been applied, a green 40 mph/60 km/h.
checkmark is displayed.
Adapting to route
Manual adoption
Principle
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually for the active driver assistance system.
system can be configured so that the vehicle
When the SET icon illuminates, press adapts the speed automatically to the route.
the button. For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations, if necessary:
Speed adjustment ▷ Before making turns.
▷ Before a roundabout.
Principle ▷ Before a curve.
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance. Adapting speed automatically to route
1. Apps menu
General information
2. "Vehicle apps"
You can configure a speed adaptation for all
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h. 4. "Driver Assistance"
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim- 5. "Driving"
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or 6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
deactivated. 7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
214
System limits to all traffic situations. There is a risk of

Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info. braking at any time, and actively intervene
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to where appropriate.
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following Overview
situations:
▷ If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
Button Function
▷ With wintry road conditions.
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam
Assistant on/off.
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information,
refer to page 200.
Switch function on.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 35.
Sensors
Steering Assistant The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle ▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle ▷ Front radar sensor.
in the lane. For this purpose, the system ex- ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
ecutes supporting steering movements, for in-
stance when cornering. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
General information Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Depending on the speed, the system orients
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi- Functional requirements
cles in front. ▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether ▷ Sufficient lane width.
the steering wheel is being touched.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph/70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides is detected.
Safety information
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides or vehicle driving
Warning ahead is detected.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing ▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
215
▷ Turn signal switched off. Turning on the system

▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷ Cruise Control with Distance Control active. wheel.
▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Forward Collision Warning active. 2. Adjust the Steering Assistant if nec-
▷ Pedestrian Warning active. essary.
▷ Side Collision Warning active. Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is on standby and does not
Turning Steering Assistant on/off manipulate steering movements.
Assisted Driving Mode System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled.
General information
The indicator light illuminates green.
This button is used to switch the con- The system is active.
figured function on and off.
With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-
The button can be used to set the pri- destrian Collision Mitigation system and the
marily used function. Side Collision Warning are activated.

Setting the function
Press the button on the steering wheel.
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The The indicator goes out.
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
The system does not perform supportive
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
steering wheel movements.
Icon Function
Stopping Steering Assistant
Cruise Control with Distance Control. automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
The selected function is shown in green.
▷ When braking manually.
▷ With strong steering intervention.
▷ When leaving own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
216
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer- Icon Description

tain period of time and no vehicle is driving
ahead. Warning light illuminates yellow:
▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control Hands are not grasping the steering
is stopped. wheel. The system is still active.
▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas- Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tened. tic signal sounds:
Indicator light illuminates green: Hands are not grasping the steering
The system is on standby and does not wheel. System interruption is immi-
manipulate steering movements. nent.
The system reduces the speed to a
System activates automatically as soon as all standstill if applicable.
function conditions are fulfilled.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
Displays in the instrument cluster movements.
Icon Description
Indicator light illuminates gray: market version, information for the system is
The system is ready. displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Indicator light illuminates green: Additional information:
The system is activated. Assisted View, refer to page 151.
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane. Displays on the steering wheel
Warning light flashes yellow:
A lane boundary has been crossed.
The steering wheel vibrates where
applicable.
Warning light illuminates yellow and

acoustic signal may sound:
Yellow: System interruption is immi-
nent.
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
Depending on national-market ver-
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
sion: The warning light flashes or illu-
ment cluster:
minates red. A signal sounds:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
The system is switched off.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
217
The steering wheel displays can be switched ▷ Driving with gloves.

on/off if required. ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
1. Apps menu
Narrow lanes
2. "Vehicle apps"
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-
4. "Driver Assistance" stance in the following situations:
5. "Feedback via steering wheel" ▷ In construction areas.
6. "Light elements" ▷ Depending on the equipment, with auto-
matic formation of emergency lanes.
Displays in the Head-up display ▷ Within city limits.
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up display. Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
System limits favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
General information
boundaries.
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
fully used in certain situations.
are already recognized.
Safety information Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-

rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
Warning or evading.
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a Assisted Driving Mode Plus
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer Principle
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide
their vehicle through traffic jams.
and limitations.
Supporting steering movements take place
without the driver actively steering.
Additional information: General information
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Hands on the steering wheel

The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
218
Safety information Switching on Assisted Driving Mode

Plus
Warning As soon as all functional requirements
The system cannot serve as a substitute for are met, an additional icon for Assisted
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at
the system, it cannot independently react the bottom of the instrument cluster.
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus with
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation the button on the steering wheel.
closely, be ready to take over steering and The icon for Assisted Driving Mode
braking at any time, and actively intervene Plus is shown in green.
where appropriate. Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
the use of this function may be prohibited or
shown in green.
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws. The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
tant apply. Depending on vehicle equipment, this function
Additional information: can be enabled/disabled on the control dis-
play.
1. Apps menu
Functional requirements 2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ The functional requirements of the Steering 3. "Driving settings"
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 215.
5. "Driving"
▷ The Steering Assistant is active.
6. "Assisted Driving"
▷ The function is only available on certain
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
street types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or Displays in the instrument cluster
cyclists.
▷ Sufficient lane width. Icon Description
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
Indicator light green: system is active.
are detected.
▷ Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru- Indicator light white: system is ready.
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
▷ The function must be available in the coun- Gray indicator light: the system has
try in which the vehicle is driven. been interrupted.
219
Alternative displays Automatic Lane Change

plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
Assistant
are displayed as follows:
Principle
Icon Description
The Automatic Lane Change Assistant also
Indicator light green: system is active. assists when changing lanes on multi-lane
roads.
General information
Displays on the steering wheel
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
Safety information
Warning
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi- the system, it cannot independently react
nate analogously to the displays in the instru- to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
ment cluster: accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. braking at any time, and actively intervene
▷ Red: system will be deactivated. where appropriate.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-

System limits tant apply.
General information
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
▷ The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 215.
Driver Attention Camera
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
tem apply.
ing traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 193.
▷ Maximum speed approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
220
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific. Displays in the instrument cluster

▷ The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven. Icon Description
Green steering wheel icon.

Turning on/turning off Automatic
Green arrow icon for lane-changing.
Lane Change Assistant
The system carries out a lane
1. Apps menu
change.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Gray line for lane marking on the ap-
propriate side.
5. "Driving"
The system detected the lane change
6. "Assisted Driving" request. Lane change not currently
7. "Automatic Lane Change" possible.
Depending on the national-market

Changing lanes version:
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits Green steering wheel icon.
changing lanes.
Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.
2. Press the turn signal lever in the required
Lane change not possible; functional
direction to the pressure point for signaling
requirements not met.
briefly.
A supporting steering movement in the re-
quired direction can be detected a short
time later.
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Assisted View, refer to page 151.
Alternative displays
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
Canceling a lane change

The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction.
221
Icon Description

Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Green arrow icon for lane-
changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.

No arrow icon for lane-chang-
ing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on the national-

market version:
Gray arrow icon for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible;
functional requirements not
met.
System limits
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
222
Parking CONTROLS
Parking
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Warning

Additional information: the system, it cannot independently react
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
Parking assistance systems closely, be ready to take over steering and
General information where appropriate.
The parking assistance systems include differ-

ent individual systems. The individual systems Overview
provide support with assistance functions, sen-
sors and different camera views when parking
Button in the vehicle
and maneuvering or driving in reverse.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 228.
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 228.
▷ Side view, refer to page 229.
▷ 3D view, refer to page 230.
▷ Car wash view, refer to page 230.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 230.
Park assistance button
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 232.
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 232.
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 233. Panorama View
▷ Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 236.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to Sensors
page 237. The parking assistance systems are controlled
▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 241. by the following sensors:
ers.
223
CONTROLS Parking
▷ Radar sensors, side, front. General information

▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Depending on the equipment, one or more
▷ Front camera. cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on national-market version, the au-
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. tomatic camera perspective or the rearview
camera is displayed.
Operating concept
The camera-based individual systems are op- Turning display on/off
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be viewed by General information
selecting the appropriate icon. The parking assistance systems view switches
Some parking assistance systems can be set off automatically when driving forwards or if a
individually in the Park menu. certain distance or speed is exceeded.
Calling up Park menu With reverse

When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-
Via Parking Assistant button play is automatically switched on if selector
lever position R is engaged.
1. Press the button. Via Parking Assistant button

2. "Settings"
Press the button.
Via iDrive
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps" General information
3. "Driving settings" Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
4. "Driver Assistance" activated parking assistance system, the con-
5. "Parking and maneuvering" trol display will vary.
Display
Principle
The parking assistance systems support park-
ing and maneuvering or reversing by display-
ing Park Distance Control and various camera
views.
224
Parking CONTROLS
Without Parking Assistant Plus The Park Distance Control view is dis-
played.
▷ "Parking"
The view of different camera perspectives
is displayed.
▷ "3D view"
A three-dimensional view is displayed.
▷ "Car wash"
The display of your own lane can be turned
1 Toolbar, left on for easier driving into the car wash.
2 Camera image
Toolbar, right
3 Selection window
The parking assistance functions are displayed
4 Toolbar, right in the right toolbar. The display may vary de-
pending on vehicle equipment.
With Parking Assistant Plus ▷ Status of the parking assistance systems.
▷ "Autom. Parking"
Functions of the Automatic Parking Assis-
tant.
▷ "Back-Up Assistant"
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
▷ "Settings"
Settings in the Park menu.
1 Toolbar, left Status of parking assistance

2 Camera image systems
3 Selection window The status of active parking assistance sys-
4 Automatic camera perspective tems is indicated by icons in the right-hand
toolbar.
5 Side view
6 Rearview camera
7 Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Different views can be selected using the left
toolbar depending on vehicle equipment:
▷ "Rear view camera"
The view of the rearview camera is dis-
played.
▷ "Only park. sensors"
225
CONTROLS Parking
Icon Meaning Parking aid lines

No search for Automatic Parking Pathway lines
Assistant offers.
Automatic Parking Assistant has
failed.
Search for Automatic Parking As-

sistant offers is active.
Automatic Parking Assistant: if the

icon is green, the Automatic Parking
Assistant is active. The system as-
sumes vehicle control.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
Back-up Assistant: if the icon is
required when parking and maneuvering on
green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-
level roads.
tive. The system takes over the
steering. Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
Additional displays
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
era image of the display of the parking assis- Turning circle lines
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
parking and maneuvering easier.
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
Turning additional displays on/off
Via Parking Assistant button

1. Enable the camera image.
2. "Settings" Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
3. Select the desired settings. lines.
Via iDrive The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
1. Apps menu
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
2. "Vehicle apps" the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
3. "Driving settings" gle.
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
226
Parking CONTROLS
Using parking aid lines System limits

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the Safety information
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Warning
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line. Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
Obstacle marking
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
and limitations.

Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance Field of view
Control are shown by marks in the camera im- Because of the camera angle, the areas under
age. the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances. Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
Functional limitations objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
The objects displayed on the control display
tent in the following situations:
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
▷ With a door open. mate the distance to the objects on the control
▷ With open cargo area. display.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. Protruding cargo or a rear-mounted luggage
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the rack can limit the detection range of the cam-
camera image identify areas that are currently era.
not shown, such as an open door.
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
shown shaded on the control display.
227
CONTROLS Parking
Rearview camera With Parking Assistant Plus
Principle 1. Press the button.

The rearview camera helps when reverse 2. Select the icon in the selection window.
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the To exit the rearview camera view, select
vehicle is shown on the control display. another camera view in the selection win-
Additional views can be shown on the display, dow.
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
Deactivated rearview camera
General information When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- instance when the trunk is open, the camera
tance systems" chapter. image is displayed with gray shading.
Automatic camera
▷ The trunk is fully closed.
▷ The camera area is clean and clear.
perspective
Turning the rearview camera on/off Principle

The automatic camera perspective shows a
Turning the camera view on steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
automatically ing direction.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
rearview camera is automatically switched on ing situation.
if selector lever position R is engaged.
General information
Turning the camera view off As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
automatically changes to a fixed display of the area in
The rearview camera turns off automatically front of or behind the bumper or, if necessary,
when driving forward or when a certain dis- changes to side protection.
tance or speed is exceeded. When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-
matic camera perspective is exited if necessary
Turning the camera view on/off and the rearview camera view is displayed.
manually If necessary, select the automatic camera per-
spective when reverse gear is engaged. The
Without Parking Assistant Plus automatic camera perspective will then be
maintained for the current parking operation.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
2. Select the icon on the left toolbar.
To exit the rearview camera view, select
another camera view on the left toolbar.
228
Parking CONTROLS
Turning the automatic camera Display

perspective on/off
Turning the camera view on/off

automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
The icon in the selection window is selected
automatically.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view, To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
select another camera view in the selection markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
window. hicle.
▷ No markings: no obstacles detected.
Turning the camera view on/off ▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob-
manually stacles.
1. Press the button. System limits

2. Select the icon in the selection window. The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
To exit the steering-dependent camera
passing them.
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window. The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
Side protection still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera Side view
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
Principle
General information Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
tance systems" chapter. the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
General information
229
CONTROLS Parking
Turning the side view on/off General information

The selection window lets you choose the side Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
view for the left or right side of the vehicle. tance systems" chapter.
Turning the car wash view on/off

2. Select the icon for the desired vehicle
side in the selection window. 1. Press the button.
To exit the side view, select another cam- 2. "Car wash"

era view in the selection window. To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
3D view Display
Principle
When 3D view is selected, a circle is displayed
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
era icon.
into a car wash.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
Turning the 3D view on/off In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
1. Press the button. Additional information:
2. "3D view" Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 122.
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
Panorama View
Car wash view
Principle
Principle The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
The car wash view helps when driving into a
intersections.
car wash.
230
Parking CONTROLS
General information Automatic activation of panorama

Road users concealed by obstacles to the left view
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front Principle
camera and the rearview camera capture the Positions at which panorama view should
area around the side of the vehicle to improve switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
the view. vation points.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita- General information
ble for distance estimations. Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function Activation points can be used when driving for-
can be used when driving forward or in re- wards.
verse.
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- systems chapter.
Sensors
▷ A GPS signal must be received.
The system is controlled by the following cam-
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile must be ena-
eras:
bled.
▷ The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
▷ Front camera. tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point.
Turning the panoramic view on/off
Press the button. Storing activation points
1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the
system should switch on and stop.
Display
3. "Activation point"
The current position is displayed.
4. "Save activation point"
Activation points are stored with one of the
following pieces of information if possible:
▷ With the city/town.
▷ With the city/town and the street.
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the ▷ With the GPS coordinates.
bumpers of your own vehicle.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
tion, the camera view of the rearview camera
or front camera will be displayed.
231
CONTROLS Parking
Using activation points Display

The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.

2. "Settings"
3. "GPS-based"
Displaying activation points

The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
2. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
System limits
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
Editing activation points proaching road users.
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
2. "Manage points" control display does not overlap with any other
A list of all activation points is displayed. objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
3. Select an activation point as needed. other objects.
4. Select the desired setting. Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Door opening angle
Remote 3D View
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
Principle
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary. The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view, such as automatic camera perspec-
This display helps to estimate how far the
tive, enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
doors can be opened when parking.
roundings on a mobile device.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
tion.
opening angles of the doors.
General information
General information
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two hours.
232
Parking CONTROLS
Sensors ▷ The vehicle moves faster than walking

speed.
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras: ▷ In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Rearview camera. Park Distance Control
Functional requirements Principle
▷ Data transfer must be activated. Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Data protection, refer to page 62. Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
▷ The My BMW App must be installed on the in front of or behind the vehicle.
mobile end device. Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with sonic sensors can also be reported.
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated. General information
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63. The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D 6 ft/2 m.
View An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
The function can be activated or deactivated
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
individually or together with other functions.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
1. Apps menu warning is issued as early as a distance to the
2. "Vehicle apps" object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
3. "System settings" Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
4. "Data privacy" tance systems" chapter.

Safety information
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Warning
Functional limitations The system cannot serve as a substitute for
The system may not be fully functional or may the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
not be available in the following situations: the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
▷ With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
▷ With manually folded-in exterior mirrors. closely, be ready to take over steering and
▷ When other camera functions are being braking at any time, and actively intervene
performed in the vehicle. where appropriate.
233
CONTROLS Parking
Turning off the system automatically

Warning When driving forward, the system turns off au-
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance tomatically as needed when a certain distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de- or speed is exceeded.
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Turning the system on/off manually
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
Press the button.
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active. ▷ On: the LED illuminates.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Sensors If the system is manually switched on when

the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
sors:
system cannot be turned off manually when
ers.
the reverse gear is engaged.
Acoustic warning
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
Turning on the system automatically is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
The system switches on automatically in the is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
following situations: sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched on The shorter the distance to the object, the
when selector lever position R is engaged. shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles When the distance to a detected object is less
if the speed is lower than approx. than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance sounded.
depends on the situation in question. When there are objects in front of and behind
The automatic activation of detected obstacles the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
can be activated or deactivated. smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
1. Apps menu
and rear speakers.
2. "Vehicle apps"
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
3. "Driving settings" are turned off when selector lever position P is
4. "Driver Assistance" engaged.
5. "Parking and maneuvering" Depending on national-market version, the in-
6. "Automatic PDC activation" termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
234
Parking CONTROLS
Adjusting the volume

The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Parking and maneuvering" View behind vehicle.
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Visual warning
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display as soon as the system is acti-
vated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis- View next to vehicle.
played before a signal sounds.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning ▷ Shaded area: detection range of sensors.
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown ▷ Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-
for a better estimation of the space required. tected in the detection range.
Depending on the equipment, the detection ▷ Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles
range of the sensors is represented by shaded were detected in the detection range.
annular surfaces. Green, yellow, and red mark- ▷ Shaded area interrupted: the area next to
ings indicate when obstacles are detected in the vehicle has not yet been detected.
the detection zone.
When equipped with cross traffic warning: de- System limits
pending on vehicle equipment, a warning is
also shown for vehicles approaching at the General information
rear and front from the side.
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve- viously detected by the sensors when passing
hicle. by.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
Display
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be- hidden after a certain time. The area on the
hind the vehicle. side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
235
CONTROLS Parking
Unwarranted warnings If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,

Reaching the system limits can cause unwar- the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ranted warnings. ble at any time.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis- tance systems" chapter.
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Safety information
Malfunction
An icon is displayed on the control dis- Warning
play. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
Depending on the vehicle equipment: the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the detection range of the sensors is not dis- the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
played on the control display. the system, it cannot independently react
A Check Control message is displayed. accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen- closely, be ready to take over steering and
ter or another qualified service center or repair braking at any time, and actively intervene
shop. where appropriate.
Active Park Distance Control Sensors

Principle sors:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
risk of collision.
Deactivating Active Park Distance
General information Control temporarily
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre- After emergency braking, the function can be
vented under all circumstances. temporarily deactivated on the control display.
The function is available below walking speed 1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
During continued driving in this surrounding
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
situation, no further emergency braking will
performed.
occur.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
The function is automatically reactivated when
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
236
Parking CONTROLS
Settings The operating principle and operation of the

system is divided into the following steps:
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system. ▷ Parking space search.
▷ Turning on.
1. Apps menu
▷ Parking.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Driving out of parking spaces.
The parking manoeuver during parking is per-
formed automatically.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
6. "Active PDC emergency braking" the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
7. Select the desired setting. reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
Display movements.
As soon as the system engages, an

icon is displayed with a corresponding
General information
message. Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
System limits Safety information

General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis- Warning
tance systems" chapter. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
Automatic Parking Assistant the system, it cannot independently react
Principle tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support closely, be ready to take over steering and
when parallel parking and parking transverse braking at any time, and actively intervene
to the road. where appropriate.
In addition, the system makes it easier to park
out of parallel parking spaces.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of Warning
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita- The system can steer the vehicle over or
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The of damage to property. Watch surrounding
system status is displayed. traffic closely and actively intervene where
The system calculates the best possible park- appropriate.
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
237
CONTROLS Parking
Parking methods Functional requirements

Park Assist supports the following functions:
Measurement of parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space

Longitudinal parking:
▷ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
road. ▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
Perpendicular parking: reverse parking per-
pendicular to the road. The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
Parking operation
▷ Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Leaving parking spaces

Driving out of parallel parking spaces. ▷ The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
Sensors been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors: ▷ The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump- the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
ers.
238
Parking CONTROLS
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in- At the end of the parking operation, selec-
ches/15 cm. tor lever position P is set.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m The end of the parking operation is indi-
longer than the vehicle. cated on the control display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
Turning the signal tone on/off needed.
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off. Driving out of a parking space using
1. Apps menu
the Automatic Parking Assistant
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
4. "Driver Assistance" 2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
6. "Sound when available"
displayed.
Parking using the Automatic 3. Select the desired direction for driving out
of the parking space on the control display.
Parking Assistant
1. For the parking space search when driving
play.
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of Green: the system takes control of ma-
max. 5 ft/1.5 m. neuvering.
The parking space search is activated. The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
A message will be displayed at the end of
2. Press the button or engage reverse the maneuver.
gear.
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
The parking assistance systems view is driving out of parking space and driving off
displayed. as usual.
The status of the parking space search and The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
possible parking spaces are displayed on off automatically.
3. Select suggested parking method. Canceling Automatic Parking
Green: the system takes control of the Assistant manually
parking operation. The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis- celed manually at any time, e.g.:
play. ▷ Press the button.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Depending on national-market version, an ▷ "Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for control display.
Park Distance Control.
239
CONTROLS Parking
Canceling Automatic Parking System limits

Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations General information
such as the following: Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel tance systems" chapter.
or takes over steering.
No parking assistance
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
fer assistance in the following situations:
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ With insufficient distances, which are indi- ▷ For parking spaces that are only marked
cated by Park Distance Control. with lines on the ground. The system ori-
ents itself according to objects.
▷ When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex- ▷ For special parking lots such as pay parking
ceeded. lots with automatic locking mechanisms,
coin parking or mechanical parking sys-
▷ When changing over to another function on
tems.
Under certain environmental conditions, park-
▷ The turn signal opposite to the desired
ing out with Park Assist may be temporarily
parking side is switched on.
unavailable. The system limits of the Park Dis-
▷ With open cargo area. tance Control and the Automatic Parking As-
▷ With the doors open. sistant continue to apply.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever. The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed for
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
▷ On slippery ground.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
Continuing the parking operation parking space.
If parking or leaving a parking space has been ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if parking space.
needed. ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and of a port.
follow the instructions on the control display. ▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
240
Parking CONTROLS
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. Warning
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc- The system can steer the vehicle over or
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author- onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
ized service center or another qualified service of damage to property. Watch surrounding
center or repair shop. traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Back-up assistant
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store
Principle
the distance covered.
The Back-up Assistant assists when driving in
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
or confusing parking or street situations.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
General information
Driving in reverse with automated
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance steering
can be driven in reverse with automated steer- 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
ing.
The system takes over the steering. The speed 2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
must be controlled by the driver using the ac- button or engage reverse gear.
celerator pedal and the brake.
The parking assistance systems view is
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored. displayed.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- 3. "Back-Up Assistant"
Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play where required.
Safety information
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
Warning tor pedal and the brake.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for Green: the system takes control of
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
closely, be ready to take over steering and instructions for Park Distance Control.
braking at any time, and actively intervene 5. Right before the end of the stored distance
where appropriate. covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
241
CONTROLS Parking
Stop no later than when normal road traffic A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
is reached and take control of the vehicle, 4 mph/7 km/h.
such as by shifting to forward gear. If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant ▷ After driving a stored distance covered with
manually major steering-wheel angles, the function
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis- of the system will be limited for the return
tant can be canceled manually: trip.
▷ Via touchscreen: "Back-Up Assistant" Different influences can lead to side deviations
▷ Press the button. when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is
Canceling the Back-up Assistant stationary while storing the distance cov-
automatically ered.
The system automatically cancels in situations ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
such as the following: covered.
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel ▷ Certain road characteristics, such as gradi-
or takes over steering. ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
▷ When shifting from reverse to another se- ▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
lector lever position. and driving the route, for instance other
▷ During activation or intervention by driver tires or changed ambient conditions like
assistance systems. weather.
▷ After an extended period of time when the Also follow the information on system limits in
vehicle is stationary. the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
▷ When exiting the stored lane when revers-

ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
▷ When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷ In case of a slippery surface.
▷ When the vehicle is rolling, such as on a
slope.
▷ In case of changed ambient conditions.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/9 km/h.
System limits
▷ The maximum speed when driving in re-
verse is limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.
242
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options BMW IconicSounds
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
available, or may become available in the fu- adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Adaptive M chassis 5. "IconicSounds"
Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-
trollable sport chassis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-
pending on the road condition and driving
style.
Setting
The system offers different shock absorber
settings ranging from comfortable travel to
sporty driving.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the selected driving mode as well as the
road condition and driving style.
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 125.
243
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. SYNC program.
Air conditioning control Seat heating.
Overview
Active seat ventilation.
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon Function
Buttons, automatic climate control
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Icon Function
Defrost function.
Air recirculation mode.
Rear window defroster.

Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Fresh air.
244
Climate control CONTROLS
Buttons, rear automatic climate control Calling up climate control functions

Via climate control bar:
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the cli-
mate control bar.
Or:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Climate control"
Icon Function Turning the air conditioning system

Automatic program.
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "All climate functions"
Temperature. The complete air conditioning system is turned
on/off with the last settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned
Air distribution.
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Switching off.
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
View on the control display Functional requirements

▷ Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷ Defrost function is deactivated.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Rear climate control"
1 Toolbar 5. Select the desired setting.
2 Climate control functions, driver's side The rear automatic climate control can be ac-
3 Climate control functions tivated with standard setting for temperature
and AUTO program:
4 Climate control functions, passenger's side
"Activate with default settings"
5 Climate control bar
Switching on using the button

Press one of the following buttons:
245
▷ Temperature. ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-

▷ Automatic program. cupants.
▷ Air distribution, manual. At the same time, a condensation sensor con-

trols the automatic program in order to prevent
Switching off using the button window condensation to the extent possible.
Press the button. Turning the automatic program

on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Locking the rear automatic climate 2. "Automatic program"
control 3. Select the desired setting.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings" Switching the rear climate control
3. "Second row of seats" automatic program on/off
4. "Lock rear climate control"
Using the button
Press the button.
Automatic program The LED of the button is illuminated
when the automatic program is turned
Principle on.
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the Setting the intensity
desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or General information
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of individual climate control functions
General information can be individually adjusted, for example:
Depending on the equipment, the automatic ▷ "LOW"
program provides the best possible settings
▷ "MEDIUM"
for climate control functions depending on
the outside temperature, interior temperature, ▷ "HIGH"
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem- Each level has a specific control range of the
perature setting: intensity.
▷ Air flow. Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
▷ Air distribution. ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
▷ Temperature.
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Active seat ventilation.
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
246
Example of function Setting the temperature

When the automatic program is turned on, the
intensity of the seat heating can be adjusted:
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the

climate control bar.
2. Seat heating.
3. Select desired setting, for example, "HIGH".
The individually selected settings of the cli-
mate control functions are stored and auto-
matically set up again, such as after the vehicle You can set the desired temperature for driver
is started again. and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
Display ▷ Raise the temperature.
The indicator in the climate control bar pro-
▷ Lower temperature.
vides information about the temperature differ-
ence between the configured desired tempera-
ture and current interior temperature. Configuring the temperature
▷ The red or blue bar next to the temperature adjustment
display indicates the progress of heating or When the automatic program is switched on,
cooling. the heating and cooling speed can be adjusted
▷ The desired interior temperature is reached as follows:
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed. ▷ "BALANCED".
Active climate control functions such as seat This setting enables a smooth, low-noise
heating are displayed as icons in the climate adjustment of the interior temperature.
control bar.
▷ "DYNAMIC".
Active climate control functions are highlighted
The setting enables a quick adjustment of
in color in the climate control menu.
the interior temperature with a high air vol-
ume.
Temperature
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats Via iDrive
to the configured temperature and then keeps
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
the temperature constant.
2. "Settings"
General information 3. "Second row of seats"
Do not rapidly switch between different tem- 4. Set the desired temperature.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
247
Using the button Maximum cooling

Press the left or right button side to set
the desired temperature. Principle
The function enables a quick and intense cool-
Upper body temperature ing of the interior.

The air temperature in the upper body area The system is set to the lowest temperature
can be adjusted. and maximum air volume.
This does not change the set interior tempera- The function is automatically activated in the
ture for the driver and front passenger. rear when the SYNC program is turned on.
Adjusting the upper body temperature Functional requirement

1. "CLIMATE MENU" The function is available at an outside temper-
2. "Settings" ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
3. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
4. Increase or decrease temperature. Turning maximum cooling on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Air conditioning 2. "MAX A/C"
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
Principle area. Open the vents.
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-

midified and, depending on the temperature Air recirculation mode
setting, warmed again.
Functional requirement Principle

Standby or drive-ready state is switched on. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
Switching the cooling function on/off
system then recirculates the interior air.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "A/C" General information
Depending on the weather, the windshield and If there is window condensation, turn off the air
the side windows may fog up briefly when recirculation.
drive-ready state is switched on.
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
When using the cooling mode, condensation air is directed into the interior.
that will exit below the vehicle.
In the automatic recirculated-air control, out-
side air is drawn in or the interior air is circu-
lated, depending on the outside air quality.
248
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh Adjusting the air distribution
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
mode.
2. Air distribution.
Turning air recirculation on/off 3. Select the desired setting.
1. "CLIMATE MENU" The selected air distribution is displayed.
2. The current operating mode is displayed in
the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the Adjusting the air distribution of the
toolbar: rear climate control
▷ "Air recirculation" Press the button repeatedly. Select the
▷ "Fresh air" desired setting.
▷ "Auto air recirculation" The selected air distribution is shown
on the climate control display.
Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-
tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-
ent conditions in order to prevent window con-
densation. SYNC program
Principle
Air flow
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-
General information er's side and to the rear.
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed. General information
The following settings can be transferred:
Adjusting the air flow
▷ Temperature.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
▷ Air distribution.
2. Air flow.
▷ Automatic program.
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the Turning the SYNC program on/off
vehicle battery.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "SYNC"
Air distribution settings If the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed, the program is automati-
cally switched off.
General information
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-
quired in manual mode.
249
Defrost function Turning the rear window defroster

on/off
Principle Press the button.
With the defrost function, ice and condensation The LED is illuminated with rear win-
are quickly removed from the windshield and dow defroster switched on.
the front side windows.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
General information
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con- Seat heating
densation.
The air distribution is directed toward the Principle
windshield and front side windows.
The system heats the seats as necessary.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor. Make sure that air can
General information
flow to the windshield. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
are turned on automatically with the tempera-
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
ture that was last set.
vide maximum performance.
Turning the defrost function on/off Turning the seat heating on/off
Press the button. climate control bar.
The LED of the button is illuminated 2. Seat heating.
when the system is switched on.
If a consumption-optimized driving mode is se-
Rear window defroster lected, the heater output is reduced.
Principle Active seat ventilation

With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear Principle
window.
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat
Functional requirement temperature.
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
250
Switching the active seat ventilation Ventilation in the rear

on/off
climate control bar.
2. Seat ventilation.
If a consumption-optimized driving mode is se-
lected, the cooling output is reduced.
Ventilation ▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-

row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
Principle
ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
The ventilation system offers individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation
to optimize the air flows in the vehicle. Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
General information air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
Open the air vents and position them to ensure sengers.
effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend- Air quality
ing on the set desired temperature.
Front ventilation General information

The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar- Interior filter

row 1.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
▷ Thumbwheel for the variable adjustment of air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
the air flow on the vents, arrows 2. mode.
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
251
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered. Switching pre-ventilation on/off

▷ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
are filtered.
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance. 4. Select the desired setting.
Departure time
Pre-ventilation
General information
Principle Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
cle at the time of departure.
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem- ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos- set.
sibly heated using the residual engine heat. The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
General information of the week can be set.
The system can be switched on and off directly On the desired weekdays, the system will
or via a preset departure time. be switched on before the set departure
The activation time is determined based on time.
the outside temperature. The system promptly The departure time is preselected in two steps:
switches on before the selected departure
▷ Set departure times.
time.
▷ Activate departure times.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
run for some time after being switched off. tween setting and activating the departure
time and the planned departure time to allow a
sufficient period of time for the climate control.
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state. Setting the departure time
▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle 2. "Settings"
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi- 3. "Pre-ventilation"
cle battery. The system will be available 4. "Departure plan"
again after the engine is started or after a 5. Select the desired departure time.
short trip.
6. Set the desired departure time.
▷ Time and date are set correctly.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
▷ The ventilation air vents are open.
252
Activating the departure time Safety information

1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings" DANGER
3. "Pre-ventilation" If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
4. "Departure plan" is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
5. Activate the desired departure time. lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
Display odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
Icon Description
Icon in the center console danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
at the top. ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
stationary climate control in enclosed areas
Icon illuminates: a depar-
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in
ture time is activated.
enclosed garages.
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
Warning
Activating with My BMW App
When stationary climate control is in opera-
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW tion, high temperatures can occur underneath
App with remote functionality can be used to the body, for instance caused by the exhaust
turn on pre-cooling at a preset departure time system. If combustible materials, such as
or immediately. leaves or grass, come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
Pre-conditioning through sure that no combustible materials can come
Remote Engine Start in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible
Principle objects.
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools, Functional requirements
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex- ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
be removed more easily.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time. ▷ Hood is closed.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Air vents are opened.
253
Enabling the automatic engine start To switch off the system, press the button
function again three times.
The automatic engine start must be enabled

Switching off with the Start/Stop
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
button
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-
tize the car's interior. The system can be switched off directly by
pressing the Start/Stop button without de-
1. "CLIMATE MENU" pressing the brake pedal.
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning" Climate control for departure time
4. "Remote Engine Start"
General information
5. "Start engine for climate cont."
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
Turning on/turning off the pre- ture.
conditioning ▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
General information
The system is switched on once.
The system switches off automatically after
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
of the week of the scheduled departure can
The system can be switched on a maximum of be set.
two times in a row.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
The system will be available again as soon
▷ Set departure times.
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again. ▷ Activate departure times.
The system is activated automatically a few
Switching on via iDrive minutes before the set departure time. The
1. "CLIMATE MENU" system remains switched on for a short time
after the set departure time.
2. "Settings"
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
3. "Pre-conditioning"
only be activated once for the departure time.
4. "Start now"
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
Switching on/off via vehicle key tivated again.
The system can be switched on and off using Observe the information about the intended
the vehicle key. use of the vehicle.
Press the button on the vehicle key Additional information:
three times within 1 second.
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
After operating the vehicle key, it will
take approximately 3 seconds until the engine
is switched on.
254
Setting the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
Icon Description
Icon in the center console

at the top.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-condition-
ing is switched on.
Confirmation signals from the

vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
The parking lights are switched on as long as
the system is switched on.
255
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Additional information: Compatibility
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
Integrated universal remote remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
control versal remote control.
Additional questions are answered by:
Principle ▷ An authorized service center or another
The integrated universal remote control in the qualified service center or repair shop.
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
General information For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro- Control elements on the interior
grammed with the desired functions. mirror
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
▷ LED, arrow 2.
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury, ▷ Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
for example, body parts becoming jammed in trolled system, arrow 3.
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
256
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Programming the integrated Press and hold the button on the interior
universal remote control mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
Functional requirement If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
with the special features for rolling code
be fully charged at the time of programming
radio systems.
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control. ▷ LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
Programming individual buttons pleted.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- Repeat steps 3 to 5.

controlled system.
Special feature of the rolling code
2. Turn on standby state.
wireless system
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
▷ Program available button: the integrated universal remote control and the
Press the button. system also have to be synchronized.
▷ Program already assigned button: Refer to information on synchronization in the
Press and hold the button for approx. operating instructions of the remote-controlled
20 seconds. system.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly 1. Program the desired button on the interior
begin flashing orange. mirror.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the 2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to on the remote-controlled system, such as
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the garage door.
on the interior mirror. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
The required distance depends on the step.
hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held second person.
transmitter. 3. Press and hold the programmed button on
Canada: if programming with the hand-held the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the If necessary, repeat this step up to three
interior mirror button and repeatedly press times in order to end synchronization. Once
and release the hand-held transmitter but- synchronization is complete, the program-
ton for 2 seconds. med function will be carried out.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
▷ The LED illuminates green: program- Operation
ming completed. After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
Release button. tem can be operated with the button on the
▷ The LED flashes green rapidly: the interior mirror.
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
257
Press and hold the desired button of the re-

mote-controlled system within range until the
Sockets
function is triggered.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
Principle
illuminated green during the transmission of The socket can be used for electronic devi-
the radio signal. ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
General information
vidually. The total load of all sockets must not exceed
Press and hold the two outer buttons on 140 watts at 12 volts.
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green connectors.
rapidly.
All stored button assignments will be deleted. Safety information
Sun visor Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation de-
Glare shield vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
Fold the sun visor down or up. or be thrown around in the car's interior dur-
ing unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make
Glare shield from the side sure that devices and cables are not in the
airbag's area of unfolding.
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
Warning
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window. Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
Folding the sun visor in hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
of damage to property. Only connect battery
visor.
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
Warning
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Insert the ciga-
rette lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
258
Front center console USB port

1. Press on the cover.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
USB connection, see Owner’s Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
In the center armrest

2. A socket is located between the cup hold-
ers. Detach the cover.
A USB port is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
In the cargo area ▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the front center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,
large USB connectors, may block or damage
A socket is located on the right side in the the cover when it is being opened or closed.
cargo area. Unfold the cover. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the cover
is clear while opening and closing it.
259
Safety information
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
If necessary, push on the cover. or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
the tray together with the device, they may
not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects on the tray together with the device.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
A USB port is located in the center console.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
1 LED
Wireless charging tray 2 Storage area
Principle Functional requirements

The wireless charging tray allows wireless
▷ The device to be charged must be certified
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
according to the Qi standard.
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General information ▷ The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1
When inserting the device to be charged, make
x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging ▷ Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
tray. able for wireless charging.
The charging process is shown by the ▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located
charge indicator on the control display. in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
260
Inserting the mobile phone System limits

1. Open the tray cover. The charge current may be reduced or charg-
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
with the display facing up. less charging tray in the following situations:
3. Close the tray cover. ▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-

face of the tray and mobile phone.
LED displays ▷ If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
Color Meaning ▷ If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
or cards for signal transmission, are located
The blue LED stays illuminated once between the mobile phone and wireless
the inserted mobile phone with Qi charging tray.
capability is fully charged.
▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers that
Or- The mobile phone is not charging. exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
ange Temperature of the mobile phone ▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers made
may be too high or foreign object of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
may be in charging tray. parts.
▷ Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,
Red The mobile phone is not charging.
holders.
Contact an authorized service center
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
or another qualified service center or
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
repair shop.
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
Forgotten warning ble.
General information
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging
tray when leaving the vehicle.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
261
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options Glove compartment
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Safety information
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. Warning
Additional information: Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in
Safety information the event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately af-
ter using it.
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can Opening the glove compartment
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving, such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that
are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
Pull the handle.
may come loose. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-
slip pads. Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-
out the integrated key, for example, when the
car is being parked by a parking attendant.
Integrated key, refer to page 69.
262
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Fold-out compartment rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
Safety information closed storage compartments.
Warning
The open fold-out compartment protrudes Storage tray in center
into the vehicle interior. Objects in the fold-
out compartment can be thrown into the ve-
console
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or braking or evasive Opening the storage compartment
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the fold-out compartment immediately
after using it.
Opening the fold-out compartment
Press on the cover.
Closing the storage compartment

Pull the cover on the handle back.
Press the button and open the cover.

Front center armrest
Storage compartments in General information

the doors A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-
263
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening the center armrest Opening the cup holder
Press the button. Press on the cover.
Closing the center armrest

Press the lid down until it engages.
Front cup holder

Safety information
Two cup holders are located in the center con-

Warning
sole.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, Closing the cup holder
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Pull the cover on the handle back.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or Rear cup holder
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force
Safety information
objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages. Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not force
objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
264
Storage compartments CONTROLS
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not Safety information

transport hot beverages.
Warning
NOTICE Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-

struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
accident. When suspending clothing articles
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
damage to property. Press back the covers
obstruct the driver's view.
before the center armrest is folded up.
Opening the cup holder Warning

1. Fold down the center armrest. Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
2. Press the button to open the cup holder.
Closing the cup holder

Press both covers back inward in sequence
and fold the center armrest back.
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in
the rear.
265
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
ment, systems, and functions that are currently thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
available, or may become available in the fu- the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
Additional information: and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
Loading NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
Safety information There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the Steps for determining correct load
tires, damage them internally and cause limit
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char- 1. Locate the statement “The combined
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re- weight of occupants and cargo should
ducing directional stability, lengthening the never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
braking distances and changing the steering vehicle’s placard.
response. There is a risk of accident. Pay
2. Determine the combined weight of the
attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-
driver and passengers that will be riding in
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-
the vehicle.
mitted gross vehicle weight.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
Warning
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
be thrown through the vehicle interior while 150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
driving, such as in the event of an accident, amount of available cargo and luggage
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that 150) = 650 lbs)
are connected to the vehicle via a cable.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
266
Cargo area CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
calculated in Step 4. seat is not occupied, secure each of the
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and Lashing eyes in the cargo
luggage load capacity of the vehicle. area
Payload General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Overview
The maximum payload is the sum of the

weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo The lashing eyes are located in the luggage
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the compartment.
cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests. Multifunction hook
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow large cargo. General information
▷ Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with tension-
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-
gage compartment net.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests. A multifunction hook is located on the left and
right side in the cargo area.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
267
CONTROLS Cargo area
Safety information the center section can be folded down sepa-

rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
Warning
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can from the cargo area. The center section can be
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur- separately folded down from the rear.
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to Safety information
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap- Warning
propriately secured. There is a danger of jamming with folding
down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
Net sure that the area of movement of the rear
seat backrest and the of the head restraint is
clear prior to folding down.
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Warning
Storage compartment on If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
the right side cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
A storage compartment is available on the dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
right side of the cargo area. is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Storage compartment on
the left side Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
A storage compartment is located on the left limited or compromised with incorrect seat
side in the cargo area. setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Through-loading system securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
Principle seats and backrests are securely engaged or
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
down the rear seat backrests. height of the head restraints or remove them.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
268
Cargo area CONTROLS
Folding down middle section

Warning
When folding down the rear seat backrest,
vehicle components or body parts may be-
come trapped. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear seat backrest
including head restraint is clear when folding
down.
Folding down the rear seat backrest Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area

to release the rear seat backrest.
▷ Left lever: fold down the left and middle
rear seat backrest.
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
Folding back the rear seat backrest

Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
269
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle drive
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

ment, systems, and functions that are currently Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
available, or may become available in the fu- speed:
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. ▷ With gasoline engine:4500 rpm and
Additional information: 100 mph/160 km/h.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum-
stances.
Break-in procedures From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
General information increased.
Moving parts need to work together smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach-
Tires
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con- ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
trol. Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Safety information
Brake system
Brake disks and brake pads must be run in to
Warning
avoid possible brake noise. Drive cautiously for
Due to new parts and components, safety the first approx. 300 miles/500 km.
and driver assistance systems can react with
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After in-
Following part replacement
stalling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive
conservatively and intervene early if neces- Observe the break-in procedures again if com-
sary. Observe the break-in procedures of the ponents mentioned above are replaced.
respective parts and components.
270
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes Hot exhaust system
Closing the trunk lid Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the
Safety information body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system, while driving. Contact with the ex-
haust system can cause burns. There is a
Warning
risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle system, including the exhaust pipe.
and can endanger occupants and other road
users or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
Warning
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk If combustible materials, such as leaves or
of damage to property. Do not drive with the grass, come in contact with hot parts of the
trunk lid open. exhaust system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
Driving with the trunk lid open never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the that no combustible materials can come in
trunk lid open: contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in
Neutral or during parking.
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
▷ Drive moderately. Exhaust gas particulate filter
▷ Fasten the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning
belt. Principle
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot
Ice on window glass particles. The soot particles are burned at high
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu-
late filter as necessary.
NOTICE
The window will be lowered slightly when General information
pulling on the door handle. In the event of During several minutes of cleaning the follow-
frost, the window may be frozen solid and ing may occur:
may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less
of damage to property. When pulling on the
smoothly.
door handle, make sure that the window is
lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice ▷ A somewhat higher RPM is necessary to
from the window. Do not open the door with reach usual power development.
force.
271
▷ A slight smoke formation coming from the order to prevent mutual interference and to
exhaust system, even after the engine is deflect radiation from the vehicle interior.
switched off.
▷ Noises, such as those caused by the radia-
tor fan running, even several minutes after Aquaplaning
the engine is switched off. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
Overrun of the radiator fan for several minutes form between the tires and road surface.
is normal even after short trips. This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan-
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
Climate comfort windshield loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow-
ing:
▷ Only drive through when the combustion
The marked area is not covered with heat re- engine is running.
flective coating. ▷ Prevent the combustion engine from shut-
Use the marked area, such as for garage door ting down, e.g., by deactivating Auto Start/
opener, devices for electronic fee collection or Stop.
payment systems. ▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only up to a maximum
Vehicle laminated glass height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
The vehicle laminated glass provides complete ▷ Drive through water at a maximum of walk-
protection against the harmful effects of ultra- ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
violet radiation on the skin.
Safety information
Mobile radio in the vehicle
NOTICE
Warning When driving too quickly through deep water,
the water can penetrate the engine compart-
Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-
ment, the electrical system, or the transmis-
tion devices can influence one another. There
sion. There is a risk of damage to property.
is radiation due to the transmission oper-
When driving through water, do not exceed
ations of mobile communication devices.
the maximum indicated water level and the
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
maximum speed for driving through water.
property. If possible, in the car's interior only
use mobile communication devices, such as
mobile phones, with a direct connection to
an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in
272
Braking safely Ensure that this action does not endanger

other road users.
General information The heat generated during braking dries brake
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak- disks and brake pads and protects them
ing System as a standard feature. against corrosion.
Perform emergency braking in situations that In this way the brake force will be available
require such. To achieve the best possible when you need it.
brake boosting, do not reduce the pressure on
the brake pedal during full braking. Hills
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
General information
any obstacles with a minimum of steering
movement. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other-
The pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
wise, the brake system may overheat and re-
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the An-
duce braking effect.
tilock Braking System is in its active mode.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
In certain braking situations, the perforated
downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if
brake disks can emit function-related noises.
needed.
However, function-related noises have no ef-
fect on the performance and operational relia-
Safety information
bility of the brake.
Objects in the travel path of the pedals Warning

Light but consistent pressure on the brake
Warning pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake
wear and possibly even brake system failure.
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
cessive stress on the brake system.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and Warning
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not In idle state or with the drive-ready state
use loose floor mats and do not layer several switched off, safety functions, for instance
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient engine braking effect, braking assistance and
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor steering assistance, may not be available.
mats are securely fastened again after they There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt
were removed, for instance for cleaning. to drive in idle state or with drive-ready state
switched off.
Driving in wet conditions

In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or Brake disk corrosion
in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-
every few kilometers. tion on the brake pads are increased by the
following circumstances:
273
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended stationary periods.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking
slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.
Fold the cover outward.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
Installation
When using the automatic climate control, con-
Follow the assembly instructions of the roof
densation water develops and collects under-
rack.
neath the vehicle.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Roof bars
Loading
General information Because luggage racks raise the vehicle's cen-
ter of gravity when loaded, they have a ma-
Roof racks are available as optional accesso-
jor effect on vehicle handling and steering re-
ries.
sponse.
Safety information Therefore, note the following when loading

and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
Warning weights and the approved gross vehicle
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars, weight.
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
ical driving situations. There may be a risk of
loading area.
accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
Stability Control. bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using luggage straps.
Roof strip with flaps ▷ Do not let objects project into the swiveling
The mounting points are located in the roof range of the trunk lid.
strip above the doors.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and
braking with jerky movements or fast cor-
nering.
274
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk
of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M
Sport or motorsport-like competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the ve-
hicle and may affect your warranty coverage.
Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty” Booklet for further information on war-
ranty matters.
Before and after driving on a racetrack, have
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
275
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options ECO PRO
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Principle
available, or may become available in the fu- ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. on consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort features, for instance the
climate control output, are adjusted.
When certain prerequisites are met the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis-
Reducing fuel consumption sion in the D selector lever position. The ve-
hicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce
consumption. The D selector lever position re-
Principle mains engaged.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
for the reduction of consumption and emission PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an effi-
values. cient driving style.
There are some actions you can take to The achieved extended range is displayed in
change your fuel consumption and environ- the instrument cluster as bonus range.
mental impact:
▷ Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehi- General information
cle. The system includes the follow-
▷ Remove attachments after use, e.g., a rear ing EfficientDynamics functions and
carrier. EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ Close the windows and glass sunroof while ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
driving. ▷ ECO PRO climate control.
▷ Check the tire pressure regularly and in- ▷ ECO PRO view.
crease it as necessary.
▷ Driving style analysis.
▷ Switch off the engine if the vehicle is to re-
main stationary for a longer period.
▷ Drive proactively and let the vehicle coast
more often.
▷ Deactivate functions that are not required,
e.g., rear window heating.
▷ Have the vehicle serviced regularly.
276
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Overview This means that it is possible to deviate

slightly from the set temperature or to heat
Button in the vehicle or cool down the car's interior more slowly to
economize on consumption.
ECO PRO light

The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Depending on the equipment version, the dy-
namic ECO lighting function is activated in ad-
dition.
Resetting the settings

ECO PRO

2. "Settings"
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
3. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Via iDrive
1. Apps menu Using ECO PRO efficiently
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" Optimizing driving style
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Power gauge
6. Select the desired setting. When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti-
vated/deactivated:
▷ ECO PRO seat heating.
▷ ECO PRO climate control.
▷ ECO PRO light.
ECO PRO seat climate control When driving efficiently, the power gauge is
The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out- colored blue.
put of the seat heating. The display will change to gray if the driving
style is inefficient.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient. Activate adaptive recuperative braking for effi-
cient driving.
277
Display in case of inefficient driving Live Vehicle, refer to page 136

style
When driving above the efficient range,
an arrow will be displayed. The display of the efficiency analysis shows
the efficiency of the driving style.
For instance, this is displayed for the
following situations: The more efficient the driving style, the larger
the area that is displayed in color and the
▷ Excessive acceleration.
faster the bonus range increases.
▷ Excessive speed.
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed
In addition, a notice to coast in advance is dis- with an inefficient driving style.
played.
Adaptive recuperation
Driving style analysis
Principle
Principle The adaptive recuperation supports an adap-
The function helps develop an especially effi- tive and comfort-oriented driving style.
cient driving style and to conserve fuel. Various sensors analyze the current driving sit-
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. uation, e.g., the distance to the vehicle in front.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the control display. General information
This display will help you adjust your driving Adaptive recuperation is available depending
style and save some fuel. on the equipment and national-market version.
The system decides based on the situation if
General information energy is recovered through recuperation or if
The range of the vehicle can be extended by the vehicle is to coast.
adjusting your driving style. In vehicles with mild hybrid technology, the
The current trip is analyzed. power of recuperation is adaptive, which
causes the vehicle to decelerate to varying de-
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
grees when coasting.
range in the instrument cluster and on the con-
trol display.
Functional requirement The system active under the following condi-
tions:
This function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode. ▷ Brake pedal not depressed.
▷ Accelerator pedal not operated.
Calling up the efficiency evaluation ▷ ECO PRO drive mode is activated.
1. Apps menu ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
278
Activating/deactivating adaptive Additional information:

recuperation Current driving condition, refer to page 154.
Adaptive recuperation is deactivated by acti-
vating SPORT driving mode. Exemplary driving situations
Adaptive recuperation is activated when If a route can be traveled without an antici-
changing to another driving mode. pated need for braking, it is advantageous to
roll.
Display The following exemplary driving situations may
be suitable:
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without
Adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the obstacles.
instrument cluster. ▷ Coasting on a distance without obstacles.
Additional information: Avoid late or strong braking.
Power gauge, refer to page 147.
Display on the control display ▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on ▷ Brake is not depressed.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
Current driving condition, refer to page 154. temperature.
The function is available in the speed
Engine off/coasting range from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to
100 mph/160 km/h.
Principle Operation via shift paddles

The drive system allows the vehicle to roll
freely with minimal deceleration in selector Principle
lever position D. This driving condition is refer- Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
red to as coasting. This reduces fuel consump- Coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
tion. paddles.
Vehicles with mild hybrid technology do not
consume fuel when coasting. Activating/deactivating coasting via
shift paddles
General information Long press the right shift paddle to activate.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
the function often and supports the efficient
effect of coasting.
System limits
Coasting is automatically adapted to the re-
▷ While Active Cruise Control is active.
spective driving situation.
▷ With defective, dirty or covered sensors.
The coasting mode is displayed in the Live Ve-
hicle menu as efficient coasting.
279
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces-
sive current.
280
281
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
This chapter describes model-specific equip- NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
Additional information: There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. promptly.
Follow the following when NOTICE

refueling Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of
the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
General information Painted surfaces may be damaged by con-
tact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel-
environment. There is a risk of damage to
ing.
property. Avoid overfilling.
When refueling, hook the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler
nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off. Fuel cap
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks General information
off the first time. If the fuel filler cap is not fitted correctly, the
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly emissions indicator light illuminates on the in-
after refueling, otherwise the emissions warn- strument cluster.
ing light may illuminate. Additional information:
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 138.
station.
Additional information: Safety information
Fuel quality, refer to page 318.
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel va-
pors can escape. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Pay attention that
282
Refueling MOBILITY
the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed Emergency unlocking

when closing the cap.
It may be necessary in certain situations to un-
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance
with an electrical malfunction.
Opening
Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an author-
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
ized service center or another qualified service
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
center or repair shop.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
283
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options tire inflation pressure specifications apply to
the tire sizes approved by the vehicle manu-
facturer for the corresponding vehicle types.
ment, systems, and functions that are currently To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
available, or may become available in the fu- please note the following:
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. ▷ Tire sizes of the vehicle.
Additional information: ▷ Maximum speed for driving.
On the control display
The current tire inflation pressure values and
Tire pressure the intended tire inflation pressure values for
the mounted tires can be displayed on the con-
General information trol display.
The tire condition and tire pressure influence To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
the following: tire sizes must be stored in the system and
must have been set for the mounted tires.
▷ The service life of the tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-
▷ Driving safety.
cated on each tire.
▷ Driving comfort.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is
▷ Fuel consumption. located in the lower area of the control display.
Safety information Checking the tire pressure
Warning General information

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres- The tires heat up while driving. The tire pres-
sure may heat up significantly and sustain sure increases with the tire temperature.
damage. This will have a negative impact Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
on aspects of handling, such as steering and loss.
braking response. There is a risk of accident. The displays of inflation devices may under-
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
and correct it as needed, for instance twice
a month and before a long trip. Checking via tire inflation pressure
specifications in tire pressure table
Tire pressure specifications 1. Determine the intended tire inflation pres-
sure levels for the mounted tires.
In the tire pressure table 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
The tire pressure table, refer to page 284, con-
tains all tire inflation pressure specifications for
given tire sizes at ambient temperature. The
284
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac- pressure values on the control display, reset
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
intended tire inflation pressure. If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
4. Make sure that all valve caps are screwed the flat tire monitor.
onto the tire valves.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the Tire inflation pressures up to
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold 100 mph/160 km/h
tires or tires at the same temperature as the For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
ambient temperature. optimum driving comfort, follow the tire infla-
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels tion pressure specifications in the tire pressure
when the tires are cold, i.e.: table and adjust as necessary.
▷ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least two hours after a trip.
If equipped with an emergency wheel: check
the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the
cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.
Checking using the tire inflation

pressure specifications on the control The tire inflation pressure specifications can
display also be found on the tire pressure label on the
1. Apps menu driver's door pillar.
2. "Vehicle apps" Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Tire pressure values up to
5. Check whether the current tire inflation
100 mph/160 km/h
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value. 430i, 430i xDrive
6. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
Tire size Pressure specifications
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
in bar/PSI
intended tire inflation pressure.
The display of current tire pressure on the con- Specifications in
trol display may be restricted when the vehicle bar/PSI with cold
is stationary. After a short drive, the tire pres- tires
sure is updated.
225/45 R 18 95 H 2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36

After correcting the tire pressure
XL A/S
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
225/45 R 18 95 H
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
XL M+S
cally. Make sure that the tire settings are cor-
rect. With tires that cannot be found in the tire
285
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
225/40 R 19 93 H 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 225/40 R 19 93 H 2.7 / 39 2.8 / 41

XL A/S XL A/S
Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Front: 225/45 R 2.5 / 36 -

18 95 Y XL 18 95 Y XL
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33 Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33
18 99 Y XL 18 99 Y XL
Front: 225/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Front: 225/40 R 2.7 / 39 -

19 93 Y XL 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 255/35 R - 2.5 / 36

19 96 Y XL 19 96 Y XL
Front: 225/35 R 2.7 / 39 - Front: 225/35 R 2.9 / 42 -

20 90 Y XL 20 90 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/30 R - 3.0 / 44

20 92 Y XL 20 92 Y XL
Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Front: 225/45 R 2.5 / 36 -

18 95 V XL M+S 18 95 V XL M+S
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33 Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33

18 99 V XL M+S 18 99 V XL M+S
Front: 225/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Front: 225/40 R 2.7 / 39 -

19 93 H XL M+S 19 93 H XL M+S
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 255/35 R - 2.7 / 39

19 96 H XL M+S 19 96 H XL M+S
M440i xDrive M440i

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
225/45 R 18 95 H 2.5 / 36 2.6 / 38 225/45 R 18 95 H 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

XL A/S XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 H 225/45 R 18 95 H
XL M+S XL M+S
286
Tire size Pressure specifications For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
in bar/PSI optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table and
225/40 R 19 93 H 2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41 adjust as necessary.
XL A/S
Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Tire pressure values over

18 95 Y XL 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33
430i, 430i xDrive
18 99 Y XL
Without high-speed tuning feature
Front: 225/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
19 93 Y XL Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.5 / 36
19 96 Y XL Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
Front: 225/35 R 2.8 / 41 - tires
20 90 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R - 3.0 / 44

225/45 R 18 95 H 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
20 92 Y XL
XL A/S
Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 - 225/45 R 18 95 H
18 95 V XL M+S XL M+S
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33 225/40 R 19 93 H 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44
18 99 V XL M+S XL A/S
Front: 225/40 R 2.5 / 36 - Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
19 93 H XL M+S 18 95 Y XL
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.5 / 36 Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33
19 96 H XL M+S 18 99 Y XL
Front: 225/40 R 2.4 / 35 -

Tire inflation pressures at maximum 19 93 Y XL
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.4 / 35
19 96 Y XL
Warning
Front: 225/35 R 2.7 / 39 -
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
20 90 Y XL
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for Rear: 255/30 R - 2.8 / 41
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from 20 92 Y XL
the relevant table on the following pages.
Front: 225/45 R 2.5 / 36 -
Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
18 95 V XL M+S
occur.
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.5 / 36
18 99 V XL M+S
287
Tire size Pressure specifications M440i xDrive

in bar/PSI Without high-speed tuning feature
Front: 225/40 R 2.6 / 38 - Tire size Pressure specifications
19 93 H XL M+S in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.7 / 39 Specifications in
19 96 H XL M+S bar/PSI with cold
tires
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications 225/45 R 18 95 H 2.7 / 39 2.9 / 42

in bar/PSI XL A/S
Specifications in 225/45 R 18 95 H
bar/PSI with cold XL M+S
tires
225/40 R 19 93 H 2.9 / 42 3.1 / 45
XL A/S
225/45 R 18 95 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39 Front: 225/45 R 2.5 / 36 -
H XL M+S 18 95 Y XL
Front: 225/45 R 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33
18 95 Y XL 18 99 Y XL
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.6 / 38 Front: 225/40 R 2.7 / 39 -
18 99 Y XL 19 93 Y XL
Front: 225/40 R 2.8 / 41 - Rear: 255/35 R - 2.5 / 36
19 93 Y XL 19 96 Y XL
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.8 / 41 Front: 225/35 R 2.9 / 42 -
19 96 Y XL 20 90 Y XL
Front: 225/35 R 3.1 / 45 - Rear: 255/30 R - 3.0 / 44
20 90 Y XL 20 92 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R - 3.2 / 46 Front: 225/45 R 2.7 / 39 -
20 92 Y XL 18 95 V XL M+S
Front: 225/45 R 2.8 / 41 - Rear: 255/40 R - 2.5 / 36
18 95 V XL M+S 18 99 V XL M+S
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.8 / 41 Front: 225/40 R 2.9 / 42 -
18 99 V XL M+S 19 93 H XL M+S
Front: 225/40 R 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 255/35 R - 2.9 / 42
19 93 H XL M+S 19 96 H XL M+S
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.7 / 39
19 96 H XL M+S With high-speed tuning feature
288

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
225/45 R 18 95 2.7 / 39 2.9 / 42 225/45 R 18 95 H 2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42

H XL M+S XL A/S
Front: 225/45 R 2.8 / 41 - 225/45 R 18 95 H

18 95 Y XL XL M+S
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.6 / 38 225/40 R 19 93 H 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45

18 99 Y XL XL A/S
Front: 225/40 R 3.1 / 45 - Front: 225/45 R 2.3 / 33 -

19 93 Y XL 18 95 Y XL
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.9 / 42 Rear: 255/40 R - 2.3 / 33

19 96 Y XL 18 99 Y XL
Front: 225/35 R 3.4 / 49 - Front: 225/40 R 2.5 / 36 -

20 90 Y XL 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 255/35 R - 2.5 / 36

20 92 Y XL 19 96 Y XL
Front: 225/45 R 3.1 / 45 - Front: 225/35 R 2.8 / 41 -

18 95 V XL M+S 20 90 Y XL
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/30 R - 3.0 / 44

18 99 V XL M+S 20 92 Y XL
Front: 225/40 R 2.9 / 42 - Front: 225/45 R 2.6 / 38 -

19 93 H XL M+S 18 95 V XL M+S
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.9 / 42 Rear: 255/40 R - 2.6 / 38

19 96 H XL M+S 18 99 V XL M+S
Front: 225/40 R 2.8 / 41 -

M440i 19 93 H XL M+S
Without high-speed tuning feature Rear: 255/35 R - 2.8 / 41
19 96 H XL M+S
With high-speed tuning feature
289
Tire size Pressure specifications 18: rim diameter in inches

in bar/PSI 96: load bearing capacity
Specifications in Y: speed code letter

bar/PSI with cold ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex-
tires ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h
Maximum tire load

225/45 R 18 95 2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-
H XL M+S
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Front: 225/45 R 2.6 / 38 - Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
18 95 Y XL sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating –
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.6 / 38 GAWR – on the certification label on the driver
18 99 Y XL door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must
be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Front: 225/40 R 2.8 / 41 - Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
19 93 Y XL rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.9 / 42
19 96 Y XL Speed letter
Front: 225/35 R 3.1 / 45 - Designation Maximum speed
20 90 Y XL
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 255/30 R - 3.4 / 49
20 92 Y XL R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
Front: 225/45 R 2.9 / 42 - S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

18 95 V XL M+S
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Rear: 255/40 R - 2.9 / 42
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
18 99 V XL M+S
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
Front: 225/40 R 2.8 / 41 -
19 93 H XL M+S W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Rear: 255/35 R - 2.8 / 41 Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
19 96 H XL M+S
(Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire marking Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0123
Tire size xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
245/45 R 18 96 Y xxx: tire size and tire design
245: nominal width in mm 0123: tire age
45: cross-sectional relationship in % Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
R: radial tire code
290
Tire age Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
Recommendation are AA, A, B, and C.
Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires Those grades represent the tire's ability to
at least every 6 years. stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
Production date test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
You can find the tire production date on the tire marked C may have poor traction perform-
sidewall. ance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Designation Production date
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
DOT … 0123 1st week of 2023 and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Temperature
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and maximum section width. and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
heat when tested under controlled conditions
ture A
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
DOT Quality Grades material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Treadwear tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Traction AA A B C sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
Temperature A B C
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to A represent higher levels of performance on
these grades. the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Warning
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
well on the government course as a tire graded
or in combination, can cause heat buildup
100. The relative performance of tires depends
and possible tire failure.
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
Runflat tires
tics and climate. Runflat tires, refer to page 295, are labeled
with a circular icon containing the letters RSC
marked on the tire sidewall.
291
M+S Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the

statutory regulations on the minimum tread
Winter tires, as well as all-season tires with
depth.
better winter performance than summer tires,
can be identified by the M+S marking on the
tire side wall.
Tire damage
Tire tread General information
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign
Summer tires bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
risk of aquaplaning. can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
Winter tires with low-profile tires, which provide less cush-
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for speed, especially if the vehicle is equipped with
winter driving conditions. low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or another vehicle
All-season tires malfunction:
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
▷ Unusual vibrations.
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter driving conditions. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
Minimum tread depth dency to pull to the left or right.
▷ Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear
in the area of the tire shoulder.
Damage can be caused by the following situa-
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
Distributed over the tire circumference are ▷ Incorrect tire storage.
the tire manufacturer’s wear indicators with a
height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve
as an indicator of tire tread wear.
The positions of the wear indicators are

marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
292
Safety information tire combinations on the basis of the following

criteria:
▷ Tire size, e.g., tire width, aspect ratio.
Warning
▷ Wheel size, e.g., rim diameter, offset.
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con- Ask an authorized service center or another
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- qualified service center or repair shop about
age is suspected while driving, immediately wheels and tires that are suitable for the vehi-
reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and cle as well as special equipment.
tires checked. To do so, drive carefully to an
authorized service center or another qualified Safety information
service center or repair shop. Have vehicle
towed or transported as needed. Do not re-
Warning
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.
Wheels and tires that are not suitable for
the vehicle can damage parts of the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of accident. The vehicle
Warning manufacturer recommends that you use only
Tires can become damaged by driving over wheels and tires that have been approved as
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at suitable for the vehicle type.
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec-
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
Warning
may be a risk of accidents and risk of dam-
age to property. If possible, avoid driving over Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
objects or road conditions that may damage problems, for instance unexpected loosening
tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully. of the lug bolts and damage to the brake
disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not
mount steel wheels.
Exchanging wheels and

tires Warning
Unsuitable wheel/tire combinations will im-
Mounting and wheel balancing pair vehicle handling and a number of sys-
tem functions, such as the Antilock Braking
Have the wheel mounted and balanced by an
System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is
a risk of accident. The vehicle manufacturer
recommends that you use only wheels and
tires that have been approved as suitable
Approved wheels and tires for the vehicle type. Following tire damage,
have the original wheel/tire combination re-
General information mounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Only certain wheel/tire combinations are suit-
able depending on vehicle and equipment.
The vehicle manufacturer determines wheel/
293
Recommended tire brands Winter tires
General information
Tire types are developed for each vehicle and

optimized specifically for the individual require-
ments of that vehicle, e.g.: Winter tires are recommended for operating on
▷ Handling. winter roads.
▷ Comfort. Winter tires can be identified by the mountain
and snowflake icon, as well as the M+S mark-
▷ Noise characteristics.
ing on the tire sidewall.
Specially developed tires are marked with
a star on the tire sidewall. After replacing So-called all-season tires with M+S marking
wheels and tires, the vehicle manufacturer rec- but without mountain and snowflake icon have
ommends using star-marked tires again. The better winter properties than summer tires.
vehicle manufacturer recommends that you As a rule, all-season tires do not perform the
use tires of the same make and tread design. same as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

New tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
than the permissible speed for winter tires,
ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
attach an info sign showing the permissible
Drive conservatively for the first maximum speed in the driver's field of vision.
200 miles/300 km. The info label is available from an authorized
Retreaded tires ter or repair shop.
When driving on winter tires, observe the
Warning speed limit for winter tires. Do not exceed this
limit.
Retreated tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of accident.
Changing runflat tires
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec- When changing from runflat tires to standard
ommend the use of retreaded tires. tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle con-
tains an emergency wheel or tire mobility kit.
For more information, contact an authorized
ter or repair shop.
294
Wheel change between axles General information

The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup-
Warning porting to a limited degree and may also in-
clude special rims.
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the
the front and rear axles can cause damage tire to remain drivable to a limited degree in
to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of the event of a tire pressure loss.
accident. Do not rotate the tires between the Follow the instructions for continued driving
axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or with a flat tire.
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Safety information
Different abrasion patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in Warning
pairs between the axles to achieve even abra- The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
sion. For more information, contact an author- tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
ized service center or another qualified service instance, reduced directional stability when
center or repair shop. After changing, check braking, braking distances are longer and the
the tire pressure and correct, if needed. self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
Storing tires not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Tire pressure
Identification
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Storage
▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave the tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the tire
sidewall.
Runflat tires
Principle
Runflat tires permit continued driving under
limited conditions even in the event of a com-
plete tire pressure loss.
295
Repairing a flat tire Overview
Storage
Safety precautions
Depending on the equipment, storage for the
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip tire repair set is provided as follows:
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▷ In the cargo area under the cargo floor
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. panel.
▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ In the cargo area on the left or right side.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front ▷ In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
Sealant bottle and filler hose
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
Tire repair set

1 Sealant bottle
Principle 2 Sealant bottle outlet
With the tire repair set, minor tire damage 3 Filler hose
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued 4 Sealant bottle connection
driving. 5 Wheel valve connection
General information
Compressor
▷ The filled in tire sealant closes the damage
from the inside when it hardens.
▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire re-
pair set found on the compressor and seal-
ant bottle.
▷ The use of a tire repair set can be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures above ap-
prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
▷ Do not remove foreign objects that have
penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects
1 Compressor
only when they are visibly protruding from
the tire. 2 Tire pressure display
▷ The compressor can be used to check the 3 Pressure reducing valve button
tire inflation pressure. 4 Sealant bottle mount
296
5 Connector for socket Preparing the tire repair set

6 Power switch 1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on
the housing of the compressor.
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, 2. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to
have all vehicle occupants get out and the stop.
make sure that they remain outside the
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Remove the warning label for maximum
permissible speed from the compressor
and attach it in a visible location in the vehi-
cle interior.
▷ Remove the warning label from the sealant 3. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the
bottle and stick it to the rim. sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
297
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
screw the connecting piece of the filler hose to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire
onto the valve. pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi.
While the tire is being filled with tire sealant,
the tire pressure can briefly reach approx.
6 bar/87 psi. Do not turn off the compres-
sor in this phase.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the

connector into the power socket in the vehi-
cle interior.
Filling the tire with sealing 2. Switch off the compressor.

compound
Checking the tire pressure
Safety information Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure dis-
play of the compressor. The tire pressure must
DANGER be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is

Tire pressure too high
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire
pollutants which are colorless and odorless. pressure with the pressure reducing valve on
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also the compressor.
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
ensure sufficient ventilation. reached
Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact
NOTICE an authorized service center or another quali-
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not run the compressor for
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
more than 10 minutes. reached
1. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
Filling the tire with sealing compound 2. Disconnect the hose from the sealant bottle
1. With standby state or drive-ready state and the valve on the wheel.
switched on, switch on the compressor. 3. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
298
4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area. Do not continue driving unless a minimum
5. Immediately drive 5 miles/10 km to ensure tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed.
that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in Contact an authorized service center or an-
the tire. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Do not exceed the speed limit of 6. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.
50 mph/80 km/h. ▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than drive-ready state turned on, turn on the
12 mph/20 km/h. compressor and let it run for a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
Tire sealant may spray from the damaged
area during the initial wheel rotations. ▷ Reduce tire pressure: Press the pres-
sure reducing valve button on the com-
pressor.
Adjusting the tire pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
Remove and stow the tire repair set
2. Connect the hose directly to the compres-
1. Switch off the compressor.
sor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audi-
bly engages. 2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor
and the valve on the wheel.
4. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
5. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the speed limit of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled
screw the connecting piece of the hose of 125 miles/200 km.
onto the valve.
Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of
the tire repair set promptly.
▷ Flat tire monitor, refer to page 308.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 300.
System limits
4. Insert the connector into the socket in the If the tire cannot be made drivable, contact an
vehicle interior. authorized service center or another qualified
5. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure service center or repair shop.
display of the compressor. With Tire Pressure Monitor: Using sealant can
damage the air pressure sensor. In this case,
299
have the electronics checked and replaced at Tire size Wheel size Rim offset (IS)
the next opportunity.
225/45 R18 7.5J x 17 25
Snow chains Information on the wheel size and rim offset is

located on the inside of the wheel.
Safety information The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that
are only suitable for certain models.
Information on wheels and tires approved for
Warning
the vehicle can be requested from an author-
Mounting snow chains on unsuitable tires ized service center or another qualified service
can cause the snow chains to come into con- center or repair shop.
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc-
of accidents or risk of damage to property.
tions.
Only mount snow chains on tires that are
designated by their manufacturer as suitable If vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
for the use of snow chains. tor: When using snow chains, do not reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor, otherwise, incorrect val-
ues may be displayed.
Warning If vehicle is equipped with flat tire monitor:

When using snow chains, do not initialize the
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
flat tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect values
tires and vehicle components. There may be
may be displayed.
a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the snow chains are al- When driving with snow chains, activate the
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed Dynamic Traction Control briefly to optimize
according to the snow chain manufacturer's the drive power.
instructions.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Fine-link snow chains when using snow chains.
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types
of fine-link snow chains have been tested by Tire pressure monitor
the manufacturer of the vehicle and recom-
mended as road-safe and suitable. Principle
For information on suitable snow chains, con- The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire
tact an authorized service center or another pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres-
qualified service center or repair shop. sure has dropped.
Use General information

Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in-
equipped with the tires of the following wheel/ flation pressure and tire temperature.
tire sizes:
Depending on the tires detected or registered,
the system displays the specified nominal
300
pressures on the control display and compares ▷ After a tire or wheel change.
them with the current tire pressures. ▷ After a reset, for tires with special ap-
If tires are being used that are not specified proval.
in the tire inflation pressure details on the ve- ▷ After changing the tire setting.
hicle, such as tires with special approval, the
▷ For tires with special approval:
system needs to be actively reset. The system
will then take over the actual tire inflation pres- ▷ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was
sures as the target pressures. performed with the correct tire inflation
pressure.
When operating the system, also note the in-
formation found in the Tire inflation pressure ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
chapter. justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
▷ Wheels with air pressure sensor.
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 284.
Safety information Tire settings
General information
Warning The information about the mounted tires can
The display of the target pressures is not be entered in the tire settings if the system
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de- does not automatically detect the tires.
tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
inflation pressure values. In this case, it can- on the vehicle or directly on the tires.
not be guaranteed that the notification of a
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a
when the tire pressure is corrected.
risk of injury and risk of damage to property.
Ensure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires For summer and winter tires, the tire details
are displayed correctly and match the details entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel
on the tires and on the vehicle. change, the settings of the tire sets used last
can be selected.
Functional requirements Adjusting the tires

The following prerequisites must be met for 1. Apps menu
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a 2. "Vehicle apps"
tire pressure loss is not assured:
3. "Vehicle status"
▷ After each tire or wheel change, the system
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
detects and updates the mounted tires on
the control display and displays them after 5. "Tire settings"
a short trip. 6. "Tire selection"
Enter the information about the mounted 7. "Manual"
tires in the tire settings when the system 8. "Tire type"
does not automatically detect the tires.
9. Select the tire size for the rear axle.
▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-
For tires with special approval:
vate until after driving for a few minutes:
301
"Other tires" priate nominal pressure is always displayed,

Observe further proceeding in the perform independent of the weather situation, tire tem-
a reset section. peratures and travel times.
10. Select the maximum speed to be driven. The displayed nominal pressure may change
and may differ from the tire inflation pressure
11. "Save tire settings"
details on the door pillar of the driver's door.
The measurement of the current tire inflation The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor-
pressure is started. The measurement prog- rected to the value of the displayed target
ress is displayed. pressures.
The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted
Status display if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire
settings.
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Tire conditions
control display, e.g., whether or not the system
is active. General information
1. Apps menu Tire and system status are indicated by the
2. "Vehicle apps" color of the wheels and a text message on the
control display.
3. "Vehicle status"
Any existing messages may not be deleted if
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor" the nominal pressure is not reached after the
The current status is displayed. tire inflation pressure is corrected.
Current tire pressure All wheels green

The current tire pressure is displayed for each ▷ The system is active and bases warnings
tire. on the target pressures.
The current tire inflation pressures may ▷ For tires with special approval: the system
change during driving or depending on the out- is active and bases warnings on the tire
side temperature. inflation pressures stored during the last re-
set.
Current tire temperature
The current tire temperatures are displayed One to four yellow wheels
depending on the model. A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur-
The current tire temperatures may change red in the indicated tires.
while driving or due to the outside tempera-
ture. Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
Nominal pressure losses.
The nominal pressure for the tires on the front Possible causes:
and rear axles is displayed.
The specified nominal pressures take the in-
fluence of driving and outside temperature on
the tire temperature into account. The appro-
302
▷ Malfunction. Safety information

▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings.
Warning
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
performed for the system.
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Runflat tires
For tires with special approval: can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
performing a reset of accident. Do not continue driving if the
1. Apps menu vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the information on runflat tires and continued
2. "Vehicle apps"
driving with these tires.
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Make sure that the tire settings are correct.
With recommended tire pressure test
Tire settings, refer to page 301. Message
6. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive An icon with service information is shown on
off. the control display and, if necessary, in the My
7. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset". BMW App.
8. Drive off. Icon Possible cause
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol-
lowing is displayed: "Resetting tire pressure…". Leak detected on the tire.
After a travel time of several minutes, the set

tire inflation pressures are accepted as the
predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is Measure
completed automatically while driving.
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the control display are shown in If a tire inflation pressure check is
green and the following is displayed: "Reset required
successful."
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When Message
you continue driving the reset resumes auto- An icon with a Check Control message appears
matically. on the control display.
Messages: for tires without special Icon Possible cause

approval Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, for instance
General information when the tire has not been suffi-
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta- ciently inflated or in the case of a nat-
bility Control may be turned on. ural steady tire pressure loss.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
303
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
containing the letters RSC marked on the
Message tire sidewall.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in Runflat tires, refer to page 295.

the instrument cluster. 3. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
sage appears on the control display. page 305.
Icon Possible cause
Messages: for tires with special
There is a tire pressure loss.
approval
General information
Measure When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a bility Control may be turned on.
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill- Safety information
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires and correct if necessary. Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
If there is a significant tire pressure
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
loss steering and braking response. Runflat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
Message
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
A yellow warning light is illuminated in vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the instrument cluster. the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
trol display. If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire Message

pressure loss. An icon with a Check Control message appears
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
standard tires or runflat tires.
304
Icon Possible cause If there is a significant tire pressure

loss
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire Message
has not been sufficiently inflated.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
The system has detected a wheel
the instrument cluster.
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
below the level of the last reset. pears in a Check Control message on the con-
No reset was performed for the sys- trol display.
tem. The system issues a warning
Icon Possible cause
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset. There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
Measure No reset was performed for the sys-
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as tem. The system issues a warning
needed. based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Measure

Message Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
the instrument cluster. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
sage appears on the control display. containing the letters RSC marked on the
tire sidewall.
Icon Possible cause
Runflat tires, refer to page 295.
There is a tire pressure loss.
3. Read the description on what to do in case
No reset was performed for the sys- of a flat tire.
tem. The system issues a warning
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
based on the tire inflation pressures
page 305.
stored during the last reset.
Actions in the event of a flat tire

Measure
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a Standard tires
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
Check the tire pressure in all four tires,
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
for instance using the tire pressure display
in all four tires and correct if necessary.
from a tire repair set.
3. Perform a system reset.
305
For tires with special approval: when the Possible driving distance with a flat tire
tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the The possible driving distance which may be
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been safely traveled varies depending on how the
reset. In this case, perform the reset. vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
If no tire damage can be identified, con- conditions, outside temperature. The distance
tact an authorized service center or another traveled may be less but may also be more if
qualified service center or repair shop. an economical driving style is used.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire If the vehicle is loaded with an average
repair set or by changing the wheel. weight and used under favorable conditions,
Using sealant, e.g., from the flat tire kit, may the possible distance traveled may be up to
damage the air pressure sensor. Replace the 50 miles/80 km.
air pressure sensor at the next opportunity.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Runflat tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions
Safety information such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
Warning ▷ Longer braking distances.
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
instance, reduced directional stability when or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
braking, braking distances are longer and the potholes.
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do Final tire failure
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire.
Maximum speed Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
dent.
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized
Continued driving with a flat tire service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
System limits
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers. Temperature
2. Do not exceed a speed of The tire inflation pressure depends on the
50 mph/80 km/h. tire's temperature.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tires at the next opportunity. tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
306
These circumstances may cause a warning Declaration according to NHTSA/

when temperatures fall very sharply. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Following a temperature-related warning, the System
target pressures are displayed on the control Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
display again after a short distance. should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
Sudden tire pressure loss by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
The system cannot indicate sudden and se- placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If the
rious tire damage caused by external circum- vehicle has tires of a different size than the
stances. size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine
Failure performing a reset the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.) As an added safety feature, the vehi-
Tires with special approval: the system will not
cle has been equipped with a tire pressure
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a
for example a flat tire may be indicated al-
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
Malfunction illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
Message the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
The yellow warning light flashes and is under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
then illuminated continuously. A Check and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Control message is displayed. It may reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
Measure is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct
▷ A wheel without air pressure sensor is tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
mounted: Have the wheels checked as reached the level to trigger illumination of the
needed. TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The vehicle
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
the same transmission frequency: The sys- tion indicator to indicate when the system is
tem automatically reactivates after leaving not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
the area of the interference. indicator is combined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale. When the system detects a mal-
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
function, the telltale will flash for approximately
was unable to complete the reset. Perform
one minute and then remain continuously il-
a system reset again.
luminated. This sequence will continue upon
▷ If the Tire Pressure Monitor malfunctions: subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
service center or another qualified service cator is illuminated, the system may not be
center or repair shop. able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
307
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- 3. "Vehicle status"

ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- 4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
The status is displayed.
or wheels on the vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly. Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol-
lowing situations:
Flat tire monitor ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
Principle ▷ After a tire or wheel change.
The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure
loss while driving and issues a warning if the Performing initialization
tire pressure has dropped. When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
General information flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
The system detects tire pressure loss on the the tire inflation pressures.
basis of rotation speed differences between Do not initialize the system when driving with
the individual wheels while driving. snow chains.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame- 1. Apps menu
ter and therefore the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel changes. The difference 2. "Vehicle apps"
will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 3. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla- 4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires. 5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
Functional requirements 6. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following prerequisites must be met for 7. Drive off.
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
The initialization is completed while driving,
tire pressure loss is not assured:
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ After a tire or wheel change, an initialization
The initialization automatically continues when
was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
driving continues.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was performed.
Messages
Status display General information
The current status of the flat tire monitor can When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor bility Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.
is active.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
308
Safety information To do this, check the tire pressure in all four

tires, for instance using the tire pressure
display from a tire repair set.
Warning
When the tire inflation pressure in all four
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as have been initialized. In this case, initialize
steering and braking response. Runflat tires the system.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
If tire damage cannot be identified, contact
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
an authorized service center or another
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
qualified service center or repair shop.
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires. 2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair set or by changing the wheel.
Indication of a flat tire Runflat tires

Safety information
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- Warning

sage appears on the control display.
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
Icon Possible cause tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
instance, reduced directional stability when
There is a flat tire or a major tire
braking, braking distances are longer and the
pressure loss.
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Measure
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- Maximum speed
vers. You may continue driving with a damaged tire
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon Continued driving with a flat tire
containing the letters RSC marked on the Follow the following when continuing to drive
tire sidewall. with a damaged tire:
Runflat tires, refer to page 295. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
3. Read the description on what to do in case vers.
of a flat tire. 2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Actions in the event of a flat tire 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
Standard tires
When the tire inflation pressure in all four
1. Identify the damaged tire. tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
309
have been initialized. In this case, initialize ▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all
the system. four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Possible driving distance with a flat tire ▷ Sudden and serious tire damage caused
The possible driving distance which may be by external circumstances cannot be recog-
safely traveled varies depending on how the nized in advance.
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road ▷ The system has not been initialized.
conditions, outside temperature. The distance
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
traveled may be less but may also be more if
an economical driving style is used. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions, ▷ When driving with snow chains.
the possible distance traveled may be up to
50 miles/80 km.
Changing wheels/tires
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han- General information
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions When using runflat tires or a tire repair set, the
such as the following: wheel does not always need to be changed
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle. immediately in the event of a breakdown when
▷ Longer braking distances. there is tire pressure loss.
▷ Changed self-steering properties. If necessary, a suitable wheel change tool, e.g.,

a jack, is available as an accessory from an
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
potholes.
Final tire failure

Safety information
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire. Warning
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of The jack is only provided for short-term lifting
the tire could come loose and cause an acci- of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all
dent. safety precautions are observed, there is a
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips
service center or another qualified service cen- over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
ter or repair shop. When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do
not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on
the drive-ready state.
System limits
The system may be delayed or malfunction in
310
or risk of damage to property. When cranking

Warning up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel well.
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of
the jack to bear weight. The load-carrying
capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex- Warning
ceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall
a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on
supports under the jack. it. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or
Warning pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by an authorized service cen-
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer,
ter or another qualified service center or re-
is provided in order to perform a wheel
pair shop.
change in the event of a breakdown. The
jack is not designed for frequent use, e.g.,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become NOTICE
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten
and risk of damage to property. Only use the the wheel lock bolt can damage the wheel
jack to change an emergency or spare wheel lock bolt. There is a risk of damage to prop-
in the event of a breakdown. erty. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and
tighten the wheel lock bolt.
Warning
The jack may slip on soft, uneven, or slippery
Securing the vehicle against rolling
ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc. There is a away
risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on
a flat, solid, slip-resistant surface. General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
Warning away when changing a wheel.
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle

and for the jacking points on the vehicle only.
There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other
vehicle or cargo using the jack.
Warning
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle
may be damaged or the jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury
311
On a level surface
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed. Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
On a slight downhill gradient 2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on
the wheel lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
screwing on the lug bolt.
able objects, for instance rocks, under the
proper side of the wheels of both the front and
rear axles to block the car from rolling downhill. Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
Lug bolt lock
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
Principle ▷ Set the parking brake.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter wheels are in the straight-ahead position
which matches the coding. and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
Overview position P.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on- ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart- have all vehicle occupants get out and
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit. make sure that they remain outside the
312
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
hazard warning lights at an appropriate row 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or
distance. lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, remove
the wheel change set and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-
ing away.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points
2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of

the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
The jacking points are located at the indicated

positions.
Jacking up the vehicle

3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank
handle or lever clockwise.
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when us-
ing the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply
with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the jack.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon

as the jack is under load and continue turn-
ing the jack crank handle or lever with one
hand.
313
5. Make sure that the car jack foot extends 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
vertically and is at a right angle beneath the tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-
jacking point. tern.
5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclock-
wise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-
cle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if
6. Make sure that the car jack foot is vertical necessary.
and at a right angle beneath the jacking
point after extending the vehicle jack. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op-
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop, then have the damaged tire
renewed.
7. Crank the vehicle up until the vehicle jack
has the entire surface on the ground
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in-
ches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac-
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
314
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Coolant reservoir, engine

2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck 7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
4 Depending on motorization: coolant reser-
voir for additional radiator
315
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
Safety information
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
Warning hood is clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com-
partment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk NOTICE
of an accident and damage to property. Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in property. Make sure that the wipers with the
the engine compartment be performed by an wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
authorized service center or another qualified the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
Warning
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
The engine compartment accommodates both sides. Pressing again can damage the
moving components. Certain components in hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
the engine compartment can also move with Open the hood again and then close it ener-
the vehicle switched off, for instance the radi- getically. Avoid pressing again.
ator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts. Opening hood
1. Pull the lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance lock-
ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay
attention to protruding parts and keep clear
of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
2. Release the lever and pull it again, arrow 2.
driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk
of accident. Stop immediately and correctly Hood can be opened.
close the hood. 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
316
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
317
MOBILITY Operating materials
Operating materials
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Caution

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start-
Additional information: ing and stalling, especially under certain envi-
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we
Fuel recommendation recommend switching to a high quality gaso-
line brand and a higher octane grade — AKI
General information number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harm-
ful engine deposits, it is highly recommended
Depending on the region, many filling stations
to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available Failure to comply with these recommenda-
in winter, for instance helps make a cold start tions may result in the need for additional
easier. maintenance.
Gasoline
NOTICE
General information Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. system and engine. Furthermore, the cat-
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as alytic converter is permanently damaged.
containing metal must not be used. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not refuel or add the following in the case of
Fill up using fuel with a maximum ethanol con-
gasoline engines:
tent of 10 %, e.g., E10.
▷ Leaded gasoline.
The power and consumption specifications re-
fer to operating with RON 98 E10 fuel ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manga-
nese or iron.
When using minimum quality AKI 87 fuel, there
may be knocking noises as well as driving and Do not press the Start/Stop button after refu-
acoustic abnormalities. These have no effect eling with the wrong fuel. Contact an author-
on the engine service life. ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
318
Operating materials MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
General information
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of The engine oil consumption and engine oil
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that properties depend on the driving style and op-
does not comply with the minimum quality. erating conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure-
ment.
NOTICE
The engine oil consumption can increase in
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
the following situations, for instance:
and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher ▷ Sporty driving style.
ethanol content than recommended. Do not ▷ Break-in of the engine.
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
▷ Idle operation of the engine.
to M100.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi-
fied as not suitable.
Recommended gas quality Different Check Control messages are shown
BMW recommends AKI 91. on the control display depending on the engine
oil level and engine oil properties.
M Performance model:
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
BMW recommends AKI 93.
the engine oil changed by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center or
Minimum fuel grade repair shop.
BMW recommends AKI 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- Safety information
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life. NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
319
System limits
NOTICE When making frequent short-distance trips or
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fash- using a sporty driving style, it may not be pos-
ion can cause increased engine wear and sible to calculate a measured value. In this
thus engine damage. There is a risk of dam- case, the measured value for the last, suffi-
age to property. It is recommended that you ciently long trip is displayed.
do not exceed the service intervals indicated
in the vehicle. Detailed measurement
Principle
Electronic oil measurement The engine oil level is checked when the vehi-
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
General information If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
The electronic oil measurement has two operating range, a Check Control message is
measuring principles: displayed.
▷ Monitoring.
General information
▷ Detailed measurement.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in-
When making frequent short-distance trips or
creased somewhat.
using a sporty driving style, for instance when
cornering aggressively, regularly perform a de-
tailed measurement.
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
Monitoring ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
pressing the Start/Stop button.
Principle ▷ The engine is at operating temperature.
The engine oil level is monitored electronically ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or
while driving and can be shown on the control P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Performing a detailed measurement
operating range, a Check Control message is 1. Apps menu
displayed.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Functional requirements 3. "Vehicle status"
A current measured value is available after ap- 4. "Engine oil level"
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 5. "Oil level measurement"
6. "Start measurement"
Displaying the engine oil level
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
1. Apps menu
via a scale.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
320
Adding engine oil Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine com-
General information partment.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis- Additional information:
played in the instrument cluster. The top-up For an overview, refer to page 315.
quantity is indicated in the message shown on
Adding engine oil
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
1. Opening the hood.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
Opening, refer to page 316.
ready state before adding engine oil.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain-
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, 3. Add engine oil.
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles. 4. Close the lid.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil-
dren. Engine oil types to add
General information
NOTICE The engine oil grade is critical for the service
life of the engine.
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to Only add with the types of engine oil which are
property. Immediately add engine oil. listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine NOTICE
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of Oil additives can damage the engine. There
damage to property. Do not add too much is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have additives.
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
321
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions
in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an
engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has
the correct oil specification.
Suitable engine oil types

When topping up engine oil, the following oil
specification applies:
Coolant
Gasoline engine General information
BMW Longlife-17 FE+. Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available coolant addi-
Alternative engine oil types tives are suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use manufacturer recommends using coolant with
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix cool-
engine oil with the following oil rating can be ant additives of different colors. Use a 50:50
added: mixing ratio of water to coolant additive. Infor-
mation on suitable coolant additives can be
Oil specification provided by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
API SL.
API SM. Safety information

API SN.
Warning
Viscosity grades With the engine hot and the cooling system
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that open, coolant can escape and lead to scald-
the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade. ing. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a cooling system with the engine cooled down.
sign in the engine compartment.
Viscosity grades
Warning
SAE 0W-20.
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of
More information about suitable oil specifica- injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
tions and engine oil viscosity grades can be allow additives to come into contact with skin,
requested from an authorized service center or eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi-
another qualified service center or repair shop. tives only.
322
Coolant level 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
General information to the specified fill level; do not overfill.
The coolant may be overfilled in the coolant 6. Close the lid.
reservoir when the vehicle is delivered from the 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
factory. Run longer to achieve the normal cool- nated as soon as possible.
ant level.
The nominal coolant level is indicated by the Disposal
maximum mark in the filler neck of the coolant
reservoir. Comply with the relevant environmen-
tal protection regulations when dispos-
Additional information: ing of coolant and coolant additives.
For an overview, refer to page 315.
Checking the coolant level Washer fluid

1. Let the engine cool down.
2. Opening the hood. General information
Opening, refer to page 316. All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres- washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
sure to dissipate, then open it. washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. be used.
5. The coolant level is correct when it is just Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.4 US
below the maximum mark in the filler neck. gal/2 liters.
Safety information
Warning
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a
risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the in-
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill op-
6. Close the lid. erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.
Adding coolant United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio
1. Let the engine cool down. is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many in-
2. Opening the hood. dividual states; do not exceed the allowable
washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply.
Opening, refer to page 316.
Follow the usage instructions on the washer
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly fluid container.
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
323
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen- Overview

trate or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con-
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid
reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment.
NOTICE
Malfunction
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win- The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid
dows can lead to damage to the car wash. concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
There is a risk of damage to property. Do lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-
not add silicon-containing additives to the low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer fluid con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washer system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different windshield
washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Fol-
low the information and mixture ratios pro-
vided on the containers.
324
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service notifications can be dis-
This chapter describes model-specific equip- played on the control display.
ment, systems, and functions that are currently Additional information:
Service notifications, refer to page 155.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is con-
tinuously stored in the vehicle key. The author-
BMW maintenance system ized service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
Principle key with which the vehicle was driven most
The maintenance system provides service no- recently.
tifications and thereby provides support in
maintaining road safety and the operational Stationary periods
reliability of the vehicle.
Stationary periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
General information account.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the In such cases, have any time-dependent main-
maintenance system may vary according to tenance, e.g., brake fluid, engine oil, and mi-
the country version. Replacement work, spare crofilter/activated-charcoal filter checks, per-
parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials formed by an authorized service center or
are calculated separately. Further information another qualified service center or repair shop.
is available from an authorized service center
shop. Maintenance Booklet for US
Models
Condition Based Service
Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for
additional information on the performance of
Principle service and maintenance work.
Condition Based Service determines the main- The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
tenance recommendation using sensors and that maintenance and repair be performed by
special algorithms that take into account the an authorized service center or another quali-
operating conditions of the vehicle. fied service center or repair shop. Records of
The system makes it possible to adapt the regular maintenance and repair work should
amount of maintenance corresponding to your be retained.
user profile.
325
MOBILITY Maintenance
Diagnostic socket Position
General information
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will
trigger the alarm system after locking the vehi-
cle.
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic
socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information There is a diagnostic socket on the driver’s

side for reading out vehicle data.
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- Emissions
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to ▷ The warning light illuminates:
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- Emissions are deteriorating. Have
tem. Improper use of the socket for Onboard the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for On- sible.
board Diagnosis for other than its intended ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and cumstances:
creates risks of personal and property dam-
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
age. Given the foregoing, the manufacture
ing in the engine.
of the vehicle strongly recommends that ac-
cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
limited to an authorized service center or an- hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
other qualified service center or repair shop rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
or other persons that have the specialized riod can seriously damage emission control
training and equipment for purposes of prop- components, in particular the catalytic con-
erly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagno- verter.
sis.
326
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
NOTICE
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
ment, systems, and functions that are currently hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
available, or may become available in the fu- property. Make sure that the wipers with the
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
Additional information: the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades
Onboard vehicle tool kit 1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers
into fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 133.
2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the

left storage compartment of the cargo area un-
der a cover.
Wiper blades
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
detent.
Safety information 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
NOTICE 6. Fold in the wipers.
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold Lights and bulbs
the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper General information
without a wiper blade installed.
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to driving safety.
327
MOBILITY Replacing components
All headlights and lights are designed using More information on the battery can be re-
LED technology at least. quested from an authorized service center or
In the event of a malfunction, the vehicle man- another qualified service center or repair shop.
ufacturer recommends having an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen- Safety information
ter or repair shop perform any necessary work.
DANGER
Safety information
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
Warning ger to life. Do not touch any components that
Focused laser light can irritate or perma- are under voltage.
nently damage the retina of the eye. There
is a risk of injury. The vehicle manufacturer
recommends having work on the lighting sys- Warning
tem, including bulb replacement, performed
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
by an authorized service center or another
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
qualified service center or repair shop.
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries
that are compatible with the vehicle type
Warning should be installed in the vehicle. Information
Intense brightness can irritate or damage the on compatible vehicle batteries is available at
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do an authorized service center.
not look directly into the headlights or other
light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Registering the battery to the
vehicle
Headlight glass The vehicle manufacturer recommends hav-
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up ing an authorized service center or another
in cool or humid weather. When driving with qualified service center or repair shop register
the lights switched on, the condensation evap- the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the bat-
orates after a short time. The headlight glass tery has been changed. Once the battery has
does not need to be changed. been registered again, all comfort features will
If, despite driving with the headlights switched be available without limitation and any Check
on, moisture such as water droplets increas- Control messages displayed which relate to
ingly forms in the light, have the headlights comfort features will disappear.
checked.
Charging the battery
Vehicle battery General information

Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
General information ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery is maintenance-free.
328
Replacing components MOBILITY
A discharged battery is indicated by a Mild Hybrid technology

red indicator light.
Principle
Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi-
cient. Part of the Mild Hybrid technology is a battery
that works with a voltage of 48 volts. Mild Hy-
The following circumstances can have a nega- brid technology can lower the fuel consump-
tive effect on the performance of the battery: tion.
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ Stationary periods of more than one month. Safety information
Safety information DANGER

Warning electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat- ger to life. Do not touch any components that
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve- are under voltage.
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery Overview
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Charging the battery

Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the jump-start terminals in the engine
compartment.
With Mild Hybrid technology: charge the bat-
tery only when the hood is opened. The battery for the Mild-Hybrid technology is
Additional information: located under a cover in the engine compart-
Jump-start terminals, refer to page 335. ment on the front passenger side.
Power interruption
After a power interruption, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set-
tings updated, for example:
▷ Parking brake, refer to page 128.
▷ With Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
329
MOBILITY Replacing components
Removing the cover Safety information

1. Turn lid up to the opened lock icon ar-
row 1.
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown
fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat-
ing.
Replacing fuses
2. Remove cover, arrow 2. The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the fuses replaced by an authorized service
Notice center or another qualified service center or
Do not exchange or work on the battery for the repair shop.
Mild Hybrid technology.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle.
Information on the fuse layout and the posi-
tions of the fuse boxes is available on the In-
ternet: fusecard.bmw.com.
330
Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and options Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
available, or may become available in the fu- First-aid kit
Additional information: General information
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with a first-aid kit.
Hazard warning system Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Hazard warning system button
The red light in the button flashes when the

hazard warning system is turned on. Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the
right storage compartment of the cargo area.
Warning triangle
BMW Roadside Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
The warning triangle is located on the inside of

the tailgate.
331
MOBILITY Breakdown Assistance
General information Teleservice Help

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- Depending on the country, Teleservice Help
hicle's condition is transmitted to the BMW enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
Roadside Assistance. BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-
There are various ways of contacting BMW mission.
Roadside Assistance. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
▷ Via a Check Control message. it through BMW Roadside Assistance.
Supplementary text messages, refer to 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
page 145. 2. Set the parking brake.
▷ Via a call with a mobile phone. 3. Turn on control display.
▷ Via the BMW app. 4. Consent to Teleservice Help.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment BMW Accident Assistance
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services. Principle
▷ Cellular network reception. BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
▷ Standby state is switched on. tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
manually General information
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
support is first offered through Teleservice Di- ately severe accident, which did not deploy any
agnosis and, where applicable, then through airbags, a Check Control message is displayed
Teleservice Help. in the instrument cluster. In addition, a text
message appears on the control display.
1. Apps menu
When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered,
2. "All apps" data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. "BMW Roadside Assistance" or select the Functional requirements
desired service. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
Follow the displays on the control display. with intelligent emergency call or BMW
A voice connection is established. ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
Teleservice Diagnosis ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Teleservice Diagnostics enables detailed vehi-
cle data to be transmitted via cellular networks, Starting BMW Accident Assistance
which is necessary for vehicle diagnosis. This
data is transmitted automatically. It may be If an accident is detected automatically
necessary to approve this on the control dis-
A text message relating to BMW Accident As-
play.
sistance appears on the control display.
332
The connection can be established directly: For technical reasons, the emergency call can-
"Contact accident assistance" not be guaranteed under unfavorable condi-
tions.
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the
Overview
stored Check Control messages for a certain
length of time.
Check Control, refer to page 145.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance

manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con-
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
SOS button
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance" Functional requirements
4. "BMW Accident Assistance" or select the ▷ Standby state is switched on.
desired service.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Follow the displays on the control display.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
A voice connection is established.
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
the vehicle has been activated.
Emergency Call
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for example if the
Intelligent emergency call
airbags are deployed, an emergency call is au-
tomatically triggered immediately after an acci-
Principle dent of corresponding severity. Automatic Col-
In case of an emergency, an emergency call lision Notification is not affected by pressing
can be triggered automatically by the system the SOS button.
or manually.
Manual triggering
General information 1. Tap the cover flap.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
LED in the area of the button illuminates
with an Assist system.
green.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a emergency call has been initiated.
connection with the BMW Response Center.
If a cancel prompt appears on the control
display, the emergency call can be aborted.
333
If the situation allows, wait in the vehicle

until the voice connection has been estab-
Jump-starting
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
General information
to the BMW Response Center has been es- If the battery is discharged, the engine can
tablished. be started using the battery of another vehicle
The BMW Response Center then makes and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca-
contact with the occupants of the vehicle bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
and initiates further steps to help.
Safety information
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan- DANGER
ces.
For this purpose, data that serves to deter- electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
mine the necessary rescue measures, for ger to life. Do not touch any components that
instance the current position of the vehicle are under voltage.
when it can be determined, is transmitted
to the BMW Response Center.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no Warning
longer heard through the loudspeakers, the
If the jumper cables are connected in the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
incorrect order, spark formation may occur.
hear the occupants of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
The BMW Response Center ends the emer- correct order during connection.
gency call.
Malfunction
Warning
The function of the emergency call may be im-
In the case of body contact between the
paired.
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
The LED near the SOS button flashes for ap- jump-starting. There is a risk of injury or risk
proximately 30 seconds. A Check Control mes- of damage to property. Make sure that no
sage is displayed. body contact occurs.
An emergency call may be disrupted in the fol-
lowing circumstances, among others:
▷ Extended vehicle idle times. Preparation
▷ Intense sunlight on vehicle roof. 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve-
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
Have checked by an authorized service center
information can be found on the battery.
shop. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles.
334
Jump-start terminals ing another attempt in order to allow the

discharged battery to recharge.
The jump-start terminals are located in the en-
gine compartment. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
Additional information: 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
For an overview, refer to page 315.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Open the covers of the jump-start terminals.
Connecting the cables Tow-starting and towing

Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/components, such as the
Safety information
radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles.
1. Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.

Warning
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding jump-start ter-
minal of the vehicle providing assistance.
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
of the cable to the positive battery terminal,
or to the corresponding jump-start terminal
of the vehicle to be started. Steptronic transmission:
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative Transporting the vehicle
jumper cable to the negative battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding engine or body General information
ground of assisting vehicle.
Do not transport the vehicle by towing it.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative battery terminal, or to the corre- Safety information
sponding engine or body ground of the ve-
hicle to be started.
NOTICE
Starting the engine The vehicle can be damaged when towing
Never use spray fluids to start the engine. the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and should only be transported on a loading plat-
let it run for several minutes at an increased form.
idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en-
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
Warning
run for approx. 10 minutes.
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
ing and securing it.
started in the usual way.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
If the first attempt to start the engine is not
property.
successful, wait a few minutes before mak-
335
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. than the vehicle to be towed.
Pushing the vehicle

Warning
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
Different levels of braking may occur when
hazardous area, push it for a short distance at
towing with adaptive recuperation. There is a
a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
risk of accident. Deactivate adaptive recuper-
Additional information: ation before towing.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 122.
NOTICE
Tow truck
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor-
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-
cur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
The vehicle should only be transported on a If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow
loading platform. bar at an inclination, note the following:
▷ Free movement is limited when cornering.
Towing other vehicles ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an inclination.
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de- Tow rope
pending on local regulations. Observe the following notes when using the
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden- tow rope:
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
a warning triangle in the rear window. the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
Safety information fastening.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
Warning tow rope in regular intervals.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to 30 mph/50 km/h.
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control handling. There is
336
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of Safety information

3 miles/5 km.
▷ When driving off to tow the vehicle, make
NOTICE
sure that the tow rope is taut.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow
Tow fitting
fitting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.
General information
Screw thread for tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car-

ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
or rear of the vehicle. push it out.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle For covers which have an opening instead of a
tool kit. marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
Observe the following notes when using the
tow fitting:
Tow-starting
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in as far as it will go. If Have the cause of starting issues corrected by
necessary, tighten with a suitable object. an authorized service center or another quali-
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-
clockwise. Additional information:
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Jump-starting, refer to page 334.
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 327.
337
MOBILITY Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
Vehicle features and options Steam cleaner and high pressure
cleaner
ment, systems, and functions that are currently Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners,
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Main-
Washing the vehicle tain sufficient distance and do not spray too
long continuously. Follow the operating in-
General information structions for the high pressure cleaners.
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as
leaves or snow in the area below the wind-
Distances and temperature
shield.
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Wash the vehicle frequently, particularly in win-
ter. Intense contamination and road salt can ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
damage the vehicle. seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
Additional information: ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 133.
Automatic car washes or car
Safety information washes
Safety information
NOTICE
When washing with an open fuel filler flap,
NOTICE
damage may occur. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Close the fuel filler flap be- Using a car wash with high pressure washers
fore washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler may result in water penetration of window
flap with a cloth. areas. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not drive into high-pressure car wash sys-
tems.
338
Vehicle Care MOBILITY
Driving out of a car wash

NOTICE Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Improper use of automatic car washes can Turn on drive-ready state.
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk
of damage to property. Follow the following
instructions: Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to Lights
avoid paint damage. Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to agents containing alcohol.
avoid damage to the body. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off
avoid damage to tires and rims. with water.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
to the exterior mirrors. scraper.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary,

rain sensor to avoid damage to the win-
After washing the vehicle
dow wiper system. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect
can be reduced. The heat generated during
Driving into a car wash braking dries brake disks and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
NOTICE Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows to minimize loss of visibility due to
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
gaged when standby state is switched off.
wiper blade wear.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
Vehicle care
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll Vehicle care products
freely.
Some car washes do not permit persons in the General information
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the BMW recommends using vehicle care and
outside when in selector lever position N. A cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock care products are available from an authorized
the vehicle. service center or another qualified service cen-
Additional information: ter or repair shop.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 122.
339
Safety information Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and

grease will gradually break down the protective
coating of the leather surface.
Warning
Remove aggressive substances, e.g.,
Cleaning agents can contain substances that sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations
are dangerous and harmful to your health. or discolorations of the leather.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the
interior, open the doors or windows. Only use
Synthetic leather care
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging. Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp
microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will
Vehicle paintwork rub into pores and folds, causing significant
abrasion and premature degradation of the
General information surface.
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving In case of major soiling, use a moist soft
safety and value retention. Environmental in- sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior
fluences in areas with elevated air pollution cleaners.
or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or Immediately remove aggressive substances,
pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
the frequency and extent of the vehicle care to colorations of the synthetic leather.
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, Fabric care
grease or bird droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent alterations or discolor- General information
ations of the finish.
In case of major contaminations, such as bev-
erage stains, use a moist soft sponge or micro-
Matte paintwork fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
for vehicles with matte paintwork.
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the fabric.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using Safety information
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
NOTICE
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy
abrasion and premature degradation of the Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
leather surface. clothing can damage the seat covers and
other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is
To guard against discoloration, such as from
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
Velcro® fasteners are closed.
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-
cause contamination on such surfaces is sub- Upholstery material care
stantially more visible. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
340
Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid Chrome surfaces

rubbing the material vigorously. Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of
Textile care water and added auto shampoo as needed.
Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor con-
tamination. Rubber components
Dampen the cloth with water. Environmental influences can cause surface
contamination of rubber parts and a loss of
Caring for special components gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning
agents for cleaning.
Displays, operating elements, and Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
protective glass of the Head-up care products at regular intervals. When clean-
display ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con-
taining vehicle care products in order to avoid
damage or noises.
NOTICE
Surfaces can be damaged by improper Wiper blades
cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or The wiper blades are cleaned by using the
from moisture or liquid of any kind. Physical washer system.
damage to the material is possible.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as
▷ Avoid pressure that is too high and do this may reduce wiper performance.
not use any scratching materials.
▷ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber Fine wood parts
cloth for cleaning displays.
Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood
▷ Clean the operating elements and, de- components with a damp cloth. Then dry with
pending on vehicle equipment, the pro- a soft cloth.
tective glass of the Head-up display with
a damp microfiber cloth and standard Kenaf
household dish soap.
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using a
suitable care product.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim Plastic components
cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not
use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-
NOTICE
ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac-
turer's instructions. Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol-
vents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic
can destroy the protective coating of adjacent
parts. There is a risk of damage to property.
components, such as the brake disk.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry cloth lightly with water, if needed.
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake disks and brake pads and protects them Do not soak the headliner.
against corrosion.
341
Seat belts Sensors and camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Warning cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the
seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of
the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or dan- Taking the vehicle out of service
ger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for When the vehicle is shut down for longer
cleaning the seat belts. than three months, special measures must
be taken. For more information, contact an
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and authorized service center or another qualified
thus have a negative impact on safety. service center or repair shop.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
The floor mats can be removed from the inte-

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated,
clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a
textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-
pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction
only.
342
343
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the specific measuring process. More specific val-
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. ues can be obtained in approval documents,
Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this, on the vehicle info label, or from an authorized
for instance due to the optional equipment service center or another qualified service cen-
chosen, national-market version, or country- ter or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g.,
model version, equipment version or country- due to tires and vehicle load.
specific measurement procedure.
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Width with mirrors in/mm 81.9/2,081
Width without mirrors in/mm 72.9/1,852
Height in/mm 54.8/1,393
Length in/mm 188/4,775
Wheelbase in/mm 112.2/2,851
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4/12.0
Weights
430i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,475/2,030
Payload lbs/kg 723/328
344
Technical data REFERENCE
430i
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,216/1,005
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
M440i powered by BMW M
430i xDrive
M440i xDrive powered by BMW M
Filling capacities
BMW 4 Series Coupe
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 15.6/59.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, re-

fer to page 318.
345
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve-
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Operation: Light: Cornering light: General.
▷ Driving tips: Things to remember when
driving: Break-in procedure: Brake system.
346
Appendix REFERENCE
347
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Airbags 165
Airbags, indicator and warning light 167
3D view 230 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 248
48V technology, see Mild Hybrid technol- Air conditioning, climate 248
ogy 329 Air distribution, manual 249
Air drying, see air conditioning 248
A Air flow, automatic climate control 249
Air outlets, see Ventilation 251
ABS, see Antilock Braking System 194 Air pressure, tires 284
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 124 Air quality 251
Acceleration sensor, see G-Meter 152 Air vent, see Ventilation 251
Accessories and parts 9 Alarm system 91
Accident Assistance, see BMW Accident Assis- Alarm, unintentional 93
tance 332 All-season tires, see Winter tires 294
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 191 All-season tires, tread 292
ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Con- All-wheel drive, see BMW xDrive 197
trol 205 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 55
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 251 Ambient light 163
Activation points, panorama view 230 Android Auto, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
Activation word 52 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Active Blind Spot Detection 180 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 323
Active Cruise Control 205 Antilock Braking System 194
Active damping control, see Adaptive M chas- Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 312
sis/suspension 243 Apple CarPlay, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
Active Guard, see Collision warning sys- gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
tems 168 Applications see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Active M Sport differential 197 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Active Park Distance Control 236 Applications, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Active Protection 191 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Active seat ventilation 250 Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Adaptive Light Control 159 tertainment, Communication 6
Adaptive lighting functions 159 Aquaplaning 272
Adaptive M chassis/suspension 243 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off as-
Adaptive recuperation 278 sistant 194
Adding engine oil types 321 Assistance with breakdown 331
Additional camera view displays 226 Assisted Driving Mode Plus 218
Additives, engine oil types 321 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis-
Adjustments, steering wheel 110 tant 215
After run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate Assisted View 151
filter 271
348
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Audio player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Battery, disposing of 330
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Battery, vehicle 328
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En- Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 335
tertainment and Communication 6 Belt carrier 105
Authorized service center, see BMW Accident Belts, see Seat belts 104
Assistance 332 Blind spot collision warning 180
Authorized service center, see BMW Roadside Blower 249
Assistance 331 Bluetooth audio, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
AUTO H button, see Automatic Hold 128 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic activation of panorama view 230 Bluetooth connection, see Owner’s Manual for
Automatic camera perspective 228 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic climate control 244 BMW Accident Assistance 332
Automatic control, headlight 156 BMW app, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation,
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109 Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
airbags 167 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam BMW Curved Display 46
Assistant 160 BMW Digital Key 86
Automatic headlight control 156 BMW display key 72
Automatic High Beam Assistant 160 BMW display key, malfunction 76
Automatic Hold 128 BMW Drive Recorder 189
Automatic Lane Change Assistant 220 BMW IconicSounds 243
Automatic locking 90 BMW ID 63
Automatic Parking Assistant 237 BMW iDrive 43
Automatic program, automatic climate con- BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 51
trol 246 BMW Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Dis-
Automatic time setting 152 play 46
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans- BMW Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW
mission 120 Curved Display 46
Automatic unlocking 90 BMW maintenance system 325
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal BMW Operating System, see BMW iDrive 43
Assistant 55 BMW Roadside Assistance 331
AUTO program, automatic climate control 246 BMW SIM Reader, see Owner’s Manual for
Auto Start/Stop function 118 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Average consumption, see Trip data 150 BMW Theater Screen, see Owner’s Manual for
Axle loads, approved 344 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW xDrive 197
B Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 264
Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 264
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 102 Brake assistant 194
Backrest, seats 99 Brake disks, break-in 270
Backrest tilt 101 Brake disks, see Brake system 270
Backrest width 102 Brake pads, break-in 270
Back-up Assistant 241 Brake pads, see Brake system 270
Bandages, see First-aid kit 331 Brake system 270
Bar for tow-starting/towing 336 Braking, information 273
349
Breakdown assistance 331 Car wash 338

Break-in 270 Car wash, automatic 338
Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 192 Car wash view 230
Brightness, control display 47 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys-
button AUTO H, see Automatic Hold 128 tem 271
Button, central locking system 88 CBS, see Condition Based Service 325
Buttons on the steering wheel 30 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
call 333 Center armrest, front 263
Button, Start/Stop 118 Center console 33
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 334 Central display area, instrument cluster 149
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
C display 46
Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
Cable for tow-starting/towing 336 tem 88
Calendar day, see Date 152 Central locking system 88
Calibration of the front seats 103 Central screen, see Control display 46
California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8
Camera cleaning 342 Change, wheels and tires 293
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten- Changing parts 327
tion Camera 193 Changing wheels 310
Camera lenses, care 342 Charging cradle 260
Camera perspective, automatic 228 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
Camera, rearview camera 228 tray 260
Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 35 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
Camera view assistance lines 226 charging tray 260
CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 205 Chassis/suspension, electronic, see Adaptive
CANCEL button, Cruise Control 202 M chassis/suspension 243
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 264 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 264 number 13
Care 338 Check Control 145
Care, displays, screens 341 Checking the engine oil level electronically 320
Care, Head-up display 341 Children, seating position 113
Care, light-alloy wheels 341 Children, transporting safely 113
Care, vehicle 339 Child restraint seats 113
Cargo 266 Child restraint systems, mounting 114
Cargo area 266 Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil-
Cargo area, enlarging 268 dren safely 113
Cargo area, securing, see Valet parking Child seat installation 114
mode 89 Child seat, mounting 114
Cargo, stowing and securing 267 Child seat mountings LATCH 115
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Child seats, see Transporting children
area 267 safely 113
Car key, see Vehicle key 69 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 341
Carpet, care 342 Chrome surfaces, care 341
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 113 Cleaning, displays, screens 341
350
Cleaning, Head-up display 341 Controller 47

Cleaning the camera 342 Control systems, driving stability 194
Climate comfort windshield 272 Convoy Assistant, see Assisted Driving Mode
Climate control 244 Plus 218
Closing with the Key Card 84 Coolant 322
Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital Coolant level 323
Key 86 Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera-
Clothes hooks 265 ture 148
Coasting 279 Cooling, maximum 248
Coasting with idling engine 279 Cooling system 322
Coat hooks 265 Cornering light 159
Collision warning systems 168 Corrosion, brake disks 273
Comfort Access 79 Cosmetic mirror 258
COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 125 Cross Traffic Warning 186
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with Dis-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 tance Control 205
Comparison of entries, see Entry compari- Cruise Control with Distance Control 205
son 45 Cruise Control without Distance Control 202
Compartments in the doors 263 Cruising range 153
Compressor 296 Cup holder, front 264
Condensation water under the parked vehi- Cup holder, rear 264
cle 274 Current driving condition 154
Condensation, windshield 250 Curved Display 46
Condition Based Service 325
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 90 D
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Damage, tires 292
ConnectedDrive services, see Owner's Manual Damping control active, see Adaptive M chas-
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi- sis/suspension 243
cation 6 Dashboard 30
Connected Music, see Owner's Manual for Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 135
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 189
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle 56 Data memory 10
Connection, electrical devices, see Sock- Data protection, settings 62
ets 258 Data, see Personal data, deleting 62
Consumption, see Trip data 150 Data, technical 344
Contactless operation of the trunk lid 83 Date 152
Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Daytime driving lights 159
Entertainment, Communication 6 Daytime running lights 159
Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pres- DCC, see Cruise Control without Distance Con-
sure Monitor 300 trol 202
Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire Defrost function 250
monitor 308 Defrost, windshield 250
Control display 46 Deleting, personal data 62
Control display, brightness 47 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 252
Control display, pop-ups 45
351
Departure time, preconditioning via Remote Drive-ready state, engine start 41

Engine Start 254 Drive-ready state, see Operating condition of
Departure time, pre-ventilation 252 the vehicle 40
Destination input 6 Drive Recorder 189
Diagnostic connection 326 Driver profiles 63
Diagnostic socket 326 Driver profiles, welcome screen 63
Differential lock 197 Drive sound, see BMW IconicSounds 243
Digital Key 86 Driving 118
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 86 Driving Assistant, see Collision warning sys-
Dimensions 344 tems 168
Dimmable exterior mirrors 109 Driving comfort 243
Dimmable interior mirror 110 Driving condition, display 154
Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 46 Driving Dynamics Control 125
Display and operating concept, see BMW Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con-
iDrive 43 trol 125
Display, current driving condition 154 Driving notes, break-in 270
Display, iDrive 45 Driving notes, general 271
Display in the windshield, see Head-up dis- Driving stability control systems 194
play 137 Driving, Start/Stop button 118
Display key 72 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 278
Display key, malfunction 76 Driving through water 272
Display key, see BMW display key 72 Driving tips, see General driving notes 271
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 162 DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 195
Display panel, see Instrument cluster 135 DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control 196
Displays 135 Dynamic Cruise Control, see Cruise Con-
Displays and icons 7 trol 202
Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 136 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M chas-
Display, speed limiting function, see Speed sis/suspension 243
Limit Info 198 Dynamic Stability Control 195
Display SPRINT 125 Dynamic Traction Control 196
Disposal, coolant 323
Disposal, vehicle battery 330 E
Distance Control, see Cruise Control 205
Distance Warning, see Park Distance Con- ECO PRO, driving style analysis 278
trol 233 ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 125
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 158 Efficient rolling, see Current driving condi-
Door opening angle 232 tion 154
Drive-off assistant 194 Electronic oil measurement 320
Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con- Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic
trol 195 Stability Control 195
Drive power reduced 147 Emergency brake, see Emergency Stop Assis-
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 193 tant 185
Driver Assistance, parking, see Parking assis- Emergency braking, see PostCrash –
tance systems 223 iBrake 191
Driver assistance systems 198 Emergency call 333
Driver Attention Camera 193 Emergency Stop Assistant 185
352
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 123 F

Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 84
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 146 Factory settings, see Vehicle data, resetting 62
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 118 Failure message, see Check Control 145
Engine compartment 315 Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
Engine coolant 322 ter 271
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 279 Fan, see Air flow 249
Engine oil filler neck 321 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 104
Engine oil, topping up 321 Fatigue Alert 192
Engine oil types to add 321 Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 193
Engine sound, see BMW IconicSounds 243 Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 192
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 41 Fault indicators, see Check Control 145
Engine start, see Jump-starting 334 Filler neck for engine oil 321
Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 41 Filter, see Interior filter 251
Engine temperature 148 Fine wood parts, care 341
Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for First-aid kit 331
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Flat tire, changing wheels 310
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire moni-
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and tor 308
Communication 6 Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Monitor 300
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 308
Entertainment, selection list in the instrument Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Moni-
cluster 146 tor 304
Entry comparison 45 Flat tire monitor 308
Equipment, interior 256 Flat tire, repairing 296
Error indicators, see Check Control 145 Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 308
eSIM telephony, see Owner’s Manual for Navi- Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 300
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire moni-
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic tor 308
Stability Control 195 Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-
Evasion Assistant, see Forward Collision Miti- tor 304
gation 170 Floods, driving through 272
Exchange, wheels and tires 293 Floor carpet, care 342
Exhaust gas particulate filter 271 Floor mats, care 342
Exhaust gas system 271 Fold-away position, wiper 133
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 271 Fold-out position 133
Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 158 Foot brake 273
Exterior mirror 108 Forward Collision Mitigation 170
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 109 Forward Collision Warning, see Forward Colli-
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109 sion Warning 170
External start, see Jump-starting 334 For Your Own Safety 8
Eyelet for towing 337 Front airbags 165
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 267 Front fog lights 162
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 327
353
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting Hands-free system 6

down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 109 Hazard warning system 331
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva- Head airbag 166
tion 167 Headlight control, automatic 156
Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator Headlight flasher 130
light 168 Headlight glass 328
Front seats 99 Headlights, care 339
Fuel 318 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Fuel filler cap 282 bulbs 327
Fuel filler flap 282 Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Auto-
Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 283 matic High Beam Assistant 160
Fuel filler flap, manual operation 283 Headliner 34
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 283 Head restraints and seats 99
Fuel gauge 153 Head restraints, front 106
Fuel quality 318 Head-up display 137
Fuel recommendation 318 Head-up display, care 341
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 345 Head-up display, position, saving see Memory
Fuses 330 function 111
Heated steering wheel 111
G Heavy cargo, stowing 267
Height, vehicle 344
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal High beams 130
Remote Control 256 Hills 273
Gasoline 318 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 194
Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas Holder for beverages, front 264
particulate filter 271 Holder for beverages, rear 264
Gasoline quality 319 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Gear change, Steptronic transmission 120 Control 256
General driving notes 271 Homepage, see Internet 7
Glare shield, see Sun visor 258 Hood 315
Glass sunroof 95 Horn 30
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 98 Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 89
Glove compartment 262 Hot exhaust gas system 271
G-Meter 152 Hour, see Time 152
GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- I
munication 6
Gross vehicle weight, approved 344 iBrake – PostCrash 191
Guest profile, see BMW ID 63 Ice, see Outside temperature 148
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 148
H IconicSounds 243
Icons and displays 7
Handbrake, see Parking brake 127 Identification marks, tires 290
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 257 Identification number, see Vehicle identification
Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for number 13
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 iDrive 43
354
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 69 Jump-starting terminals 335

Ignition key, see Vehicle key 69 Jump-start terminals 335
Inclination 101
Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 168 K
Indicator lights 138
Individual air distribution 249 Kenaf, care 341
Individual settings, see BMW ID 63 Key Card 84
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 79
charging tray 260 Key, mechanical 70
Information 6 Key, see BMW display key 72
Information on Driver Assistance, displaying, Key, see Vehicle key 69
see Assisted View 151 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 120
Initialization, see flat tire monitor 308 Knee airbag 166
Input, iDrive 45
Installation of child restraint systems 114 L
Instrument cluster 135
Instrument lighting 162 Labeling 290
Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 135 Label on recommended tires 294
Integrated key 70 Lane boundary 177
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6 Lane change assistant 220
Integrated Universal Remote Control 256 Lane departure warning 177
Intelligent emergency call 333 Lane Keeping Assistant, see Steering Assis-
Intelligent Personal Assistant 51 tant 215
Intended use 8 Lane Keeping Assistant with active side col-
Interior equipment 256 lision protection, see Side Collision Warn-
Interior filter 251 ing 183
Interior lights 163 Lane lines, additional camera view dis-
Interior lights, locked vehicle 158 plays 226
Interior mirror 110 Lane threshold, warning 177
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 110 Language, setting 53
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 110 Laser headlights, changing, see Lights and
Interior motion sensor 92 bulbs 327
Internet page 7 Laser high beams 161
Intersection Collision Warning, see Forward Lashing eyes in the cargo area 267
Collision Mitigation 170 LATCH child seat mountings 115
Interval indicator, see Service notifications 155 Lateral Parking Aid 228
Launch Control 124
J Leather care 340
LED headlights, changing, see Lights and
Jacking points 313 bulbs 327
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 313 Length, vehicle 344
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 97 Letters and numbers, entering 45
Jam protection system, windows 95 Light-alloy wheels, care 341
Journey data 150 Light carpet, see Welcome Light Carpet 158
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 120 Light control, adaptive 159
Jump-starting 334
355
Light in exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Manual control, air flow 249
Detection 180 Manually unlocking doors, see Integrated
Light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traffic Warn- key 70
ing 186 Manual mode, transmission 123
Lighting 156 Manual Speed Limiter 200
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 327 Map, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Lights 156 tertainment, Communication 6
Lights and bulbs 327 Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Lights, care 339 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Light switch 156 Marking, run-flat tire 295
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 200 Matte paintwork 340
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 146 Matt paint, care 340
Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Display 46 Maximum cooling 248
Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW Curved Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
Display 46 Info 198
Live Vehicle 136 Maximum speed, winter tires 294
Load 267 M chassis/suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive
Loading 266 M chassis/suspension 243
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 331
cargo 267 Memory function 111
Local time, see Time 152 Messages, see Check Control 145
Locking, automatic 90 Messages, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga-
Locking, see Opening and Closing 69 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Locking, settings 90 Meters, see Instrument cluster 135
Locking the rear automatic climate control 246 Microfilter, see Interior filter 251
Lock, lug bolts 312 Mild Hybrid technology 329
Loop 337 Minimum tread depth, tires 292
Low beams, operation 157 Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
Lower back support, see Lumbar support 102 tion 111
Lug bolt lock 312 Mobile devices, connecting 56
Luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 274 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
Luggage straps 267 gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Lumbar support 102 Mobile radio in the vehicle 272
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis-
M tance 332
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
Maintenance 325 tance 331
Maintenance recommendation, see Condition Mobility System, see Tire repair set 296
Based Service 325 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 205
Maintenance, see Service notifications 155 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Maintenance system, BMW 325 Safety 8
Make-up mirror 258 Moisture in headlight, see Headlight glass 328
Malfunction, BMW display key 76 Monitor, see Control display 46
Malfunction, vehicle key 72 Mounting of child restraint systems 114
Manual brake, see Parking brake 127 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Manual control, air distribution 249 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
356
M Sport differential 197 Operating principle, see BMW iDrive 43

Multifunction hook 267 Operating system, see BMW iDrive 43
Multi-function steering wheel 30 Operating temperature, see Engine tempera-
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30 ture 148
My BMW app, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga- Operation via voice 51
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
Outside temperature 148
N Overheating of the engine, see Engine temper-
ature 148
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints, Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
front 106 age 342
Net, cargo area 268 Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW In-
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, telligent Personal Assistant 53
care 341
Notifications, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga- P
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 336 Paint, vehicle care 340
Paintwork 340
O Panic alarm, see Panic mode 92
Panic mode 92
OBD, see On-board diagnosis 326 Panorama View 230
Obstacle marking, additional camera view dis- Panorama View, see Panorama View 230
plays 226 Panoramic display, see Owner’s Manual for
Octane number, see Gasoline quality 319 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Odometer, see Trip data 150 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sun-
OFF display, instrument cluster, see Standby roof 95
and Drive-ready state 148 Park Distance Control 233
Oil filler neck 321 Parking assistance lines, additional camera
Oil level, checking electronically 320 view displays 226
Oil service interval, see Service notifica- Parking assistance systems 223
tions 155 Parking assistant 237
Oil, topping up 321 Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance
Oil types to add, engine 321 systems 223
Old battery 330 Parking Assistant, see Park Distance Con-
On-board computer, see Trip data 150 trol 233
On-board diagnosis 326 Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys-
Onboard vehicle tool kit 327 tems 223
On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis- Parking brake 127
tance 332 Parking brake function, see Active Park Dis-
On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis- tance Control 236
tance 331 Parking lights 157
Opening and closing 69 Parking with Automatic Hold 128
Opening with the Key Card 84 Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate
Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi- filter 271
tal Key 86 Parts and accessories 9
Operating condition of the vehicle 40 Pathway lighting 158
357
Pathway lighting, turning on 158 Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
Payload 267 ter 271
Payload, technical data 344 Radiator fluid 322
PDC, see Park Distance Control 233 Radio information, see Owner’s Manual for
Pedestrian Warning, see Forward Collision Mit- Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
igation 170 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Performance display, see Sport displays 154 tertainment and Communication 6
Personal Assistant 51 Radio stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
Personal data, deleting 62 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Personal eSIM, see Owner’s Manual for Navi- Rain sensor 132
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 READY display, instrument cluster, see
Personal hotspot, see Owner’s Manual for Standby and Drive-ready state 148
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner’s
Personal profile, see BMW ID 63 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Personal settings 62 munication 6
Physical units, see Units of measurement, set- Rear automatic climate control 244
ting 153 Rear automatic climate control, locking operat-
Plastic parts, care 341 ing elements 246
Pop-ups, control display 45 Rear-end collision preparation 184
PostCrash – iBrake 191 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and
Power Display, instrument cluster 147 bulbs 327
Power failure 329 Rear seat backrests, folding down 268
Power interruption 329 Rearview camera 228
Power Meter, see Power Display 147 Rear-view mirror, exterior 108
Power windows 93 Rearview mirror, interior 110
Pre-conditioning 253 Rear window defroster 250
Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Moni- Recirculated-air mode 248
tor 300 Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 251
Pressure, tires 284 Recommended tire brands 294
Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 308 Recuperation, adaptive 278
Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni- Reduced drive power 147
tor 300 Refueling 282
Pre-ventilation 252 Remote 3D View 232
Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-end Remote control, see Vehicle key 69
collision preparation 184 Remote control, universal 256
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
protection system 97 control 253
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec- Remote services, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
tion system 95 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47 Remote Software Upgrade 58
Renewal, wheels and tires 293
R Replace battery, vehicle key 70
Replacement, wheels and tires 293
Racing track 275 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 327
Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 35 Replacing light diodes, see Lights and
bulbs 327
358
Replacing parts 327 Screen, see Control display 46

Reporting safety malfunctions 14 Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 296
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 205 Seat-belt extender 105
RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 202 Seat belt reminder, see Seat belt warning 106
Reserve warning, see Range 153 Seat belts 104
Reservoir, washer fluid 323 Seat belts, care 342
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 303 Seat belt warning 106
Reset, vehicle settings 62 Seat calibration 103
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 86 Seat heating 250
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 205 Seating position for children 113
RESUME button, Cruise Control 202 Seat position, saving, see Memory function 111
Retreaded tires 294 Seats and head restraints 99
Reversing Assistant 241 Seats, front 99
Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside As- Seat ventilation, active 250
sistance 331 Securing, cargo 267
Roadside parking lights 157 Selection list on the instrument cluster 146
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 257 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 120
Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see Sensors, care 342
Coasting 279 Sensors of the vehicle 35
RON, see gasoline quality 319 Service and warranty 10
Roof bars 274 Service notifications 155
Roofliner 34 Service notifications, see Condition Based
Roof luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 274 Service 325
Rope for tow-starting/towing 336 SET button, Active Cruise Control 205
Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for SET button, Cruise Control 202
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Set clock 152
RSC, see Runflat tires 295 Set day, see Date 152
Rubber components, care 341 Set time, see Time 152
Runflat tires 295 Setting, control display 47
Runflat tires, see Runflat tires 295 Settings, locking/unlocking 90
Settings, resetting, vehicle 62
S Settings, seats and head restraints 99
Shift lights 149
Safe braking 273 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 123
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 86 Shift point display 146
Safety and warning, see Collision warning sys- Shift point indicator, tachometer 149
tems 168 Shift recommendation for fuel-efficient driving,
Safety package, see Active Protection 191 see Shift point display 146
Safety systems, see Airbags 165 Shortcuts, iDrive 46
Safety systems, see Collision warning sys- Side airbag 165
tems 168 Side Collision Warning 183
Satellite radio, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Side protection, see Automatic camera per-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 spective 228
Saved stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navi- Side view 229
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Signaling, horn 30
Screen, see BMW Curved Display 46
359
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig- Start/Stop button 118

nals from the vehicle 90 Starting aid terminals 335
SIM Reader, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga- Starting, see Drive-ready state 41
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Sitting safely 99 Starting the engine with the Key Card 84
Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
vehicle 40 Start 253
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 148 Stations, see Owner’s Manual for Navigation,
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 148 Entertainment, Communication 6
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 344 Status control display, tires 302
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Status information, iDrive 44
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Status of Owner's Manual 8
Smartphone, using via voice control 55 Status, vehicle 153
Snow chains 300 Steering Assistant 215
Sockets, electrical devices 258 Steering column adjustment 110
Software Update, see Remote Software Up- Steering wheel, adjusting 110
grade 58 Steering wheel, buttons 30
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up- Steering wheel heating 111
grade 58 Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory
Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu- function 111
late filter 271 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 333 transmission 120
Sound settings, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Steptronic transmission 120
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 41
Sound system, see Owner’s Manual for Navi- Storage compartment, cargo area 268
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Storage compartment, center console 263
Speed control, see Cruise Control 202 Storage compartments 262
Speed Limit Assist 212 Storage, tires 295
Speed Limit Assistant 212 Storing the vehicle 342
Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 200 Stowing, cargo 267
Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 198 Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
Speed Limit Info 198 area 267
Speed warning 198 Summer tires, tread 292
Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M Sun visor 258
chassis/suspension 243 Supplementary Owner's Handbooks 7
Sport differential 197 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 7
Sport displays 154 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics
Sport program, transmission 120 Control 125
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 125 Switches, see Dashboard 30
Sport steering, variable 197 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dy-
Sprint function 125 namics Control 125
Stability control systems 194 SYNC program, automatic climate control 249
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8 System language, setting, see Language, set-
Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi- ting 53
cle 40
Start/stop, automatic function 118
360
T Tire tread 292

Tools 327
Tachometer 147 Torque display, see Sport displays 154
Tail light, changing, see Lights and bulbs 327 Touchpad, Controller 49
Taking the vehicle out of service 342 Tow bar 336
Tank capacity 345 Tow fitting 337
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 Towing 335
Technical data 344 Tow rope 336
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Tow-starting 335
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Traction Control 196
Telephone, selection list in the instrument Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability
cluster 146 Control 195
Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- TRACTION, driving dynamics 196
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
Temperature, automatic climate control 247 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Temperature display, see outside tempera- Traffic bulletins, see Owner’s Manual for Navi-
ture 148 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 91 Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving
Thigh support 102 Mode Plus 218
Tilt alarm sensor 92 Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane
Tilt, backrest 101 Control Assistant 215
Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 123
mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 109 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 120
Time 152 Transporting children safely 113
Time of day, see Time 152 Tread, tires 292
Time setting, automatic 152 Trip data 150
Time zone 152 Triple turn signal activation 130
Tire brands, recommended 294 Trip odometer, see Trip data 150
Tire change 293 Trunk, emergency unlocking 84
Tire damage 292 Trunk lid, contactless operation 83
Tire identification marks 290 Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 84
Tire inflation pressure 284 Trunk, see Cargo area 266
Tire marking 290 Turn indicators, see Turn signals 130
Tire pressure 284 Turning circle lines, additional camera view
Tire Pressure Monitor 300 displays 226
Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire moni- Turning circle, vehicle 344
tor 308 Turn signal, indicator light 142
Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 303 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
Tire pressure, tires 284 bulbs 327
Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire moni- Turn signals, operation 130
tor 308
Tire repair set 296 U
Tires and wheels 284
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 296 Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi-
Tire settings 301 cle 35
Tires, run-flat 295 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 93
361
Units of measurement, setting 153 Ventilation 251

Units, see Units of measurement, setting 153 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 252
Universal remote control 256 Venting, see Ventilation 251
Unlocking, automatic 90 Version Software, see Remote Software Up-
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 69 grade 58
Unlocking, settings 90 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 189
Updates made after the editorial deadline 8 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 58 tertainment and Communication 6
Upholstery material care 340 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
Upper retaining strap, top tether 116 Voice activation system 51
USB audio, see Owner’s Manual for Naviga- Voice control 51
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal
USB port, position in vehicle 259 Assistant 51
Used battery, disposing of 330 Voice recognition 51
Use, intended 8 Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Using menus, see BMW iDrive 43 Entertainment, Communication 6
V W
Valet parking mode 89 Wake word 52

Vanity mirror 258 Warning for crossing traffic 186
Variable sport steering 197 Warning function, rear-end collision 184
Vehicle battery 328 Warning light in exterior mirror, see Active
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis- Blind Spot Detection 180
tance 331 Warning light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traf-
Vehicle, break-in 270 fic Warning 186
Vehicle care 339 Warning lights 138
Vehicle care products 339 Warning messages, see Check Control 145
Vehicle data, resetting 62 Warning systems for collision hazards 168
Vehicle equipment 8 Warning triangle 331
Vehicle identification number 13 Warranty 9
Vehicle issues 331 Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9
Vehicle key 69 Washer fluid 323
Vehicle key, additional 69 Washing the vehicle 338
Vehicle key, integrated key 70 Washing, vehicle 338
Vehicle key, loss 70 Water on roads 272
Vehicle key, malfunction 72 Water, see Condensation water under the
Vehicle key, replace battery 70 parked vehicle 274
Vehicle key with display, malfunction 76 Web page 7
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display Website, see Internet 7
key 72 Weights 344
Vehicle laminated glass 272 Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 158
Vehicle paint, care 340 Welcome lights 158
Vehicle paintwork 340 Welcome screen, driver profiles 63
Vehicle status 153 Wheelbase 344
Vehicle storage 342 Wheel base, vehicle 344
362
Wheel change 310

Wheels and tires 284
Wheels and tires, exchange 293
Widgets, iDrive 44
Widgets, instrument cluster, see Central dis-
play area 149
Width, vehicle 344
WiFi connections, see Owner’s Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Window, defrosting 250
Windows, powered 93
Windshield cleaning system, see Wiper sys-
tem 131
Windshield, climate comfort 272
Windshield, defrosting 250
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 323
Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 131
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 342
Winter tires 294
Winter tires, tread 292
Wiper blades, changing 327
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 323
Wiper, fold-away position 133
Wipers, see Wiper system 131
Wiper system 131
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 260
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 260
Wood parts, care 341
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 45
Workshop, see Service notifications 155
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 327
xDrive 197
363
*BL5A7D16600W*
01405A7D166 ue

OwnersManuals2.com
OwnersManuals2.com
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your

vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:
All information surrounding navigation,

entertainment and communication
Photorealistic animations for various

vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° view: Explore your vehicle

interactively inside and out
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon

and optical character recognition on the
buttons in the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be used offline after download

*BL5A7D16600W*
01405A7D166 ue

2024 BMW 4 Series 24

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 BMW 4 Series 24

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 BMW 4 Series 24

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D166 - II/23 OwnersManuals2.com

After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade

© 2023 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Validity of the Owner's Manual Printed Owner's Manual

Context help available in the future, for specific models. The

Selecting context help from a Check Control

Additional sources of "..." Texts in vehicle used to select

BMW Driver’s Guide app 2. Second action step.

The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-

▷ First possibility. An authorized service center is happy to an-

▷ Owner's Manual. ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby

▷ California Emission Control System Limited

Right nameplate iDrive

The vehicle identification number can be found

fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the

Buttons for the central locking

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Access to vehicle interior Locking the vehicle

If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have

Panic mode Closing the cargo area automatically

▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Displays, control elements

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

Depending on the equipment: pull down the

Driver's door Activating the voice control system

Switch console 1. Press the button on the steering

Principle Canceling voice control

Call up the Media/Radio menu.

Call up the navigation map.

Call up the destination input menu

Call up the Options menu.

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant

Set-up and use

▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

Electrically adjustable seats

Press switch up or down.

Adjusting the distance Adjusting the steering wheel

▷ Back: press the button and push the head

Fold the exterior mirror in and out.

Adjust the exterior mirrors.

Storing settings Electric longitudinal setting

Entering the rear 2. Fold the seat backrest forward.

Push the seat backrest rearward

Change the entertainment ▷

Connecting via Bluetooth®

Engaging selector lever position D, N,

1. Depress the brake pedal.

Turning off drive-ready state ▷ D is drive.

1. Apply brake and engage the selector lever ▷ N is neutral.

Parking brake Light and view

Releasing the parking brake

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

Lights and lighting ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.

Front fog lights

Automatic headlight control.

Low beams. Press the lever down.